2008 GMC Envoy and Envoy Denali Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-11 Towing ................................................... 4-40
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-13 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-32 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Airbag System ......................................... 1-53 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-68
Rear Axle ............................................... 5-46
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Four-Wheel Drive ..................................... 5-47
Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Front Axle ............................................... 5-48
Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-7 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-49
Windows ................................................. 2-13 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-49
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-54
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-20 Tires ...................................................... 5-57
Mirrors .................................................... 2-39 Appearance Care ................................... 5-100
OnStar® System ...................................... 2-48 Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-108
Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-52 Electrical System .................................... 5-109
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-57 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-120
Sunroof .................................................. 2-60 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-21 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-30 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-18
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-49 Index ................................................................ 1
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-65
 Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC, www.helminc.com
the GMC Truck Emblem and the names ENVOY, and
DENALI are registered trademarks of General Motors Propriétaires Canadiens
Corporation. On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
This manual includes the latest information at the time it auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes Helm Incorporated
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first P.O. Box 07130
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Detroit, MI 48207
Canada Limited” for GMC whenever it appears in this
1-800-551-4123
manual. www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 15912670 A First Printing 2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to {CAUTION:
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures These mean there is something that could hurt
and words work together to explain things. you or other people.

Index We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help

A good place to quickly locate information about the avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found. A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
Safety Warnings and Symbols “Do Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
happen.”
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.

iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual. The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
Notice: These mean there is something that could with the text describing the operation or information
damage your vehicle. relating to a specific component, control, message,
A notice tells about something that can damage the gage, or indicator.
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv
 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Manual Seats ................................................1-2 Children (LATCH) ......................................1-41
Power Seats ..................................................1-3 Securing a Child Restraint in a
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-3 Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-47
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-4 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Heated Seats .................................................1-4 Center Rear Seat Position ..........................1-49
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ....................1-5 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-7 Right Front Seat Position ............................1-50
Head Restraints ............................................1-10 Airbag System ...............................................1-53
Rear Seats .....................................................1-11 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-56
Rear Seat Operation .....................................1-11 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-58
Safety Belts ...................................................1-13 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-59
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-13 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-59
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-18 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-60
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-26 Passenger Sensing System ............................1-61
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-31 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-66
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-31 Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-66
Child Restraints .............................................1-32
Older Children ..............................................1-32 Restraint System Check ..................................1-68
Infants and Young Children ............................1-35 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-68
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-38 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40 After a Crash ............................................1-69

1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be
sure the seat is locked in place.

1-2
Power Seats For seats with power reclining seatbacks, see “Power
Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining Seatbacks
on page 1-7.
On vehicles with power
seats, the controls used to
operate them are located Manual Lumbar
on the outboard side of
the seats. On vehicles with this
feature, the knob is
located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seat.

To adjust the seat:

• Move the seat forward or rearward using the
horizontal control.
• Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion using
the front of the horizontal control.
Turn the knob to increase or decrease lumbar support.
• Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion using
the rear of the horizontal control.
• Raise or lower the entire seat using the entire
horizontal control.

1-3
Power Lumbar Heated Seats
On vehicles with power Your vehicle may have
lumbar, the control is heated front seats. The
located on the outboard buttons used to control this
side of the seat. feature are located on the
front door armrests. The
engine must be running
for the heated seat feature
to work.

To increase or decrease support, hold the control To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
forward or rearward. the heated seat and seatback symbol. Press the button to
cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium,
and low and to turn the heated seat off. The indicator
lights above the button will come on to designate the
level of heat selected: three for high, two for medium,
and one for low. The low setting warms the seatback
and seat cushion until the seat temperature is near
body temperature. The medium and high settings heat
the seatback and seat cushion to a slightly higher
temperature. You will be able to feel heat in about
two minutes.

1-4
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with To store the memory settings, do the following:
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
button will come on to designate that only the seatback 1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
is being heated. Additional presses will cycle through recliner and lumbar, both of the outside mirrors,
the heat levels for the seatback only. and the adjustable pedals, if equipped, to the
desired position.
The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on
is turned off. page 2-24 for more information.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has been
If your vehicle has this stored.
feature, the controls for To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow
the memory function are the preceding steps, but press the other numbered
located on the driver’s door. memory control button.
To recall the memory settings, do one of the following:
• Press and release button 1 or 2 while the vehicle
is in PARK (P). A single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
• If programmed to do so through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), pressing the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter will recall the
These buttons are used to program and recall memory preset driver’s memory seat, mirrors, and adjustable
settings for the driver’s seating position, both outside pedals position. The numbers on the back of the
mirror positions, and the adjustable pedals, if equipped. transmitters, 1 or 2, correspond to the numbers
The settings for these features can be saved for up on the memory controls.
to two drivers. • If programmed to do so through the DIC, placing the
key in the ignition will recall the driver’s memory seat,
mirrors, and adjustable pedals positions.

1-5
See “Seat Recall” under DIC Vehicle Customization on To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow
page 3-58 for more information. the preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of the
seat controls. following:
Easy Exit Seat • Press the easy exit seat button on the memory
control while the vehicle is in PARK (P). The
The control for the easy exit seat function is located on seat will move to the stored exit position.
the driver’s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2.
The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall • Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the
the desired driver’s seat position when exiting or entering Driver Information Center (DIC), removing the key
the vehicle. The mirrors, power lumbar, recline, and from the ignition will move the seat to the exit
adjustable pedals, if equipped, positions will not be stored position. See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle
or recalled when using the easy exit seat function. Customization on page 3-58 for more information
The seat position can be saved for up to two drivers. on activating this feature in the DIC.
To store the easy exit seat position, do the following: If an easy exit seat position has not been stored, the
default position is all the way rearward.
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for less than three seconds. The seat will
move to the stored memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for more
than three seconds. A double chime will sound to
let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button 1 or 2.

1-6
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
{CAUTION: cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to locked.
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s used to operate them is located on the outboard
seat only when the vehicle is not moving. side of the seat(s).

1-7
 Power Reclining Seatbacks
If your seats have power
reclining seatbacks, use
the vertical power seat
control located on the
outboard side of the
seat(s).

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever. • To recline the seatback, press the control toward the
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then rear of the vehicle.
release the lever to lock the seatback in place. • To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is front of the vehicle.
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.

1-8
 {CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is

moving.

1-9
Head Restraints Pull the head restraint up
to raise it.

To lower the head restraint, press the button, located

on the top of the seatback, and push the head
restraint down.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint

is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck
injury in a crash.

1-10
Rear Seats Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
Rear Seat Operation and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Your vehicle has flip and fold second row seats which
provide additional cargo space. 2. Lift the lever, located
To flip and fold the seat(s), do the following: on the outboard side
of the seatback, and
fold the seatback
forward.

The head restraint will automatically fold out of the

way as the seatback is folded down.

1. Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion

meets the seatback and flip the seat cushion
forward.

1-11
To return the seat(s) to the original position, do the
following:

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.

1. Lift the seatback until it locks into the upright

position. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked. 2. Return the head restraints to the upright position by
reaching behind the seat and pulling it forward until
it locks into place. Push and pull on the head
restraint to make sure that it is locked.
3. Flip the seat cushion back into place.

1-12
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should collision, people riding in these areas are more
not do with safety belts. likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
{CAUTION: Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-32.
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
from it and be seriously injured or killed. You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
In the same crash, you might not be, if you are a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
and check that your passenger(s) are so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
restrained properly too. survive. But most crashes are in between. In many
of them, people who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without belts they could
have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!

1-13
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat

on wheels.

1-14
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something.
does not stop. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-15
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-16
Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
Safety Belts home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
am wearing a safety belt? your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety your control, such as bad drivers.
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. of home. And the greatest number of serious
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
are upside down. 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.

1-17
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-35. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as

much protection this way.

1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as

much protection this way.

1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The belt is behind the body.

1-24
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-25
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
the belt go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Engaging the child restraint locking feature Extender on page 1-31.
may affect the passenger sensing system. Make sure the release button on the buckle is
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61. positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.

1-26
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
shoulder belt. The belt should go back out of the way.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
lap belt on smaller occupants. both the belt and your vehicle.

1-27
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them, safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the away from the neck and head.
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. There is one guide for each outside passenger position
And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety
in the rear seat. Here is how to install the comfort
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts
guide to the shoulder belt:
in a side crash or a rollover event.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a between the interior body and the seatback.
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-69.

1-28
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.

1-29
 {CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as

described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guide. Slide the guide back onto its storage
clip located between the interior body and the seatback.

1-30
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,

and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-31
Child Restraints The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
Older Children until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 1-26 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should to the booster seat.
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-32
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and {CAUTION:
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face Never do this.
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause forces. In a crash, the two children can be
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-26.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

1-33
 {CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.

1-34
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance People should never hold an infant in their
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in not weigh much — until a crash. During a
every Canadian province says children up to some crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
age must be restrained while in a vehicle. possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
{CAUTION: on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,

they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can
strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
In addition, young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone; they need to use a child restraint.

1-35
 {CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on child

restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.

1-36
 For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be {CAUTION:
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor The body structure of a young child is quite
vehicle safety standards. unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
come with the restraint state the weight and height hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, regular safety belt may not remain low on the
there are many kinds of restraints available for hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
children with special needs. up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
{CAUTION: could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
Newborn infants need complete support, appropriate child restraints.
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in
a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so
the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.

1-37
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a

crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A forward-facing child A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
seat (B) provides restraint window.
for the child’s body
with the harness.

1-38
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
the Vehicle on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
{CAUTION: copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
A child can be seriously injured or killed in move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
a crash if the child restraint is not properly people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle child is in it.
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH Securing the Child Within the Child
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
Restraint
in this manual.

{CAUTION:
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the A child can be seriously injured or killed in
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH a crash if the child is not properly secured in
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children the child restraint. Because there are different
(LATCH) on page 1-41 for more information. A child can systems, it is important to refer to the
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not instructions that come with the restraint. Make
properly secured in the vehicle. sure the child is properly secured, following the
instructions that came with that restraint.

1-39
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
We recommend that children and child restraints
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in frontal airbag if the system detects a
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in rear-facing child restraint, no system is
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
using safety belts. airbag will not deploy under some unusual
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
{CAUTION: passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
seriously injured or killed if the right front for additional information.
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag. When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
CAUTION: (Continued) restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.

1-40
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint and attachments.
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
using only the top tether and anchor. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
lower attachments (B).
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and
its attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.

1-41
Top Tether Anchor Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint tether anchors.
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child j (Lower Anchor):
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle Seating positions with
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation two lower anchors.
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Second Row

1-42
 To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.

The labels are located above a flap, at the base of

the seatback, in the rear outside seating positions. The
anchors are located under the flap. In order to get to the
anchors you will need to pull the strap at the center of the
seat where the seat cushion meets the seatback. This will The top tether anchors for each rear seating position
allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out of the way. are located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Lift the flap to expose the anchors and then lower the Do not use the rear tie-down brackets near the liftgate
seat cushion. Be sure the cushion is locked into place. for attaching top tethers. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.

1-43
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for additional {CAUTION:
information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
the LATCH System
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
{CAUTION: break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to attach only one child restraint per anchor.
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.

1-44
 Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or
{CAUTION: the seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
Children can be seriously injured or strangled stowed position before folding the rear seat.
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
and the safety belt continues to tighten. lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
Secure any unused safety belts behind the lower attachments or the desired seating position
child restraint so children cannot reach them. does not have lower anchors, secure the child
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
one, after the child restraint has been installed. instructions and the instructions in this manual.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
restraint manufacturer. seating position.
1.2. Pull the strap at the center of the seat where
the seat cushion meets the seatback. This
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt out of the way. Lift the flap to expose the
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make anchors and then lower the seat cushion.
sure when securing unused safety belts behind See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-11
the child restraint that there is no contact between for additional information. Be sure the
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and cushion is locked into place.
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.

1-45
 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that If the position you are
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the using does not have a
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. headrest or head restraint
Refer to the child restraint instructions and and you are using a
the following steps: dual tether, route the tether
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. over the seatback.
2.2. Route and tighten the top tether according
to your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions. If your vehicle
has a cargo shade, route the top tether
between the seatback and the cargo shade.
If the position you are For vehicles that have a
using does not have a headrest or head restraint,
headrest or head restraint fold down the headrest
and you are using a or head restraint and route
single tether, route the the single tether under
tether over the seatback. the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.

See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-11.

1-46
 If the position you are Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
using has a headrest or tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
head restraint and you top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
are using a dual tether, with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
route the tether around anchored.
the headrest or head In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraint. restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different child restraint when and as the instructions say.
directions to be sure it is secure.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
Securing a Child Restraint in a on page 1-40.
Rear Outside Seat Position 1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

When securing a child restraint in a rear seating 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
position, study the instructions that came with your child shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-41 for how to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41 for
top tether anchor locations.

1-47
 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
Make sure the release button is positioned so you the retractor to set the lock.
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.

1-48
 6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41
for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Rear Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap secured in the center rear seat, although some of them
portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back will fit there. If the center seat position is too narrow
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing for your child restraint, secure it in a rear outside seat
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your position.
knee to push down on the child restraint as you If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,
tighten the belt. follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-47.

1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position {CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
Put the Restraint on page 1-40. seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions. would be very close to the inflating airbag.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61 Even though the passenger sensing system is
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34 designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
for more information on this, including important safety frontal airbag if the system detects a
information. rear-facing child restraint, no system is
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the airbag will not deploy under some unusual
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
for additional information.

1-50
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41 portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a will show you how.
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off Make sure the release button is positioned so you
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. if necessary.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-34.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

1-51
 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
the retractor to set the lock. pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.

1-52
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
Airbag System
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint. Your vehicle has the following airbags:
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting • A frontal airbag for the driver.
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child • A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly • A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat seated directly behind the driver.
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. • A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
If this happens, adjust the head restraint. the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
restraint. near the deployment opening.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
check with your dealer/retailer. on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
safety belt and let it go back all the way. along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.

1-53
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed
during a crash helps reduce your chance of to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
hitting things inside the vehicle or being something hits the side of your vehicle and in
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental the event of a vehicle rollover. They are not
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to inflate in frontal or in rear crashes.
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
replace them.
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.

1-54
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, best protection for adults, but not for young
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit safety belt system nor its airbag system is
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would designed for them. Young children and infants
be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or need the protection that a child restraint
leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in system can provide. Always secure children
position before and during a crash. Always wear properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants and
should sit as far back as possible while still Young Children on page 1-35.
maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
There is an airbag
the door or side windows in seating positions
readiness light on the
with roof-rail airbags. instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33
for more information.

1-55
Where Are the Airbags?

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the

instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

1-56
 {CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.

1-57
When Should an Airbag Inflate? Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enables
and how quickly your vehicle slows down. the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. and right front passenger’s seat. The sensors provide
For example: information that is used to determine if the airbags
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the Your vehicle has roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
vehicle hits a moving object. on page 1-53. Roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition,
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform. rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the is above the system’s designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts.
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object. of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system
predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over.

1-58
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an How Does an Airbag Restrain?
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
and how quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
airbags, deployment is determined by the location of the vehicle.
and severity of the side impact. In a rollover event,
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
roof-rail airbag deployment is determined by the
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
direction of the roll.
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing help contain the head and chest of occupants in the
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
of the airbag module. help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering ejections.
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
seating positions. those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 1-58 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.

1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? {CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at in the air. This dust could cause breathing
least partially inflated for some time after they deploy. problems for people with a history of asthma or
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-59. safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the or a door. If you experience breathing problems
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the following an airbag deployment, you should
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to seek medical attention.
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.

1-60
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, Passenger Sensing System
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
from the right front passenger airbag. the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible in the rearview
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an mirror when you start your vehicle.
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on United States
page 7-18 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.

Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will
be visible during the system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF,
or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.

1-61
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger {CAUTION:
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat. seriously injured or killed if the right front
The sensors are designed to detect the presence passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the the back of the rear-facing child restraint
right front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled would be very close to the inflating airbag.
(may inflate) or not.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
frontal airbag if the system detects a
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat, rear-facing child restraint, no system is
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child airbag will not deploy under some unusual
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
who are large enough, using safety belts.
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

1-62
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if: is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied. the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
• The system determines that an infant is present in Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
a rear-facing infant seat. Position on page 1-50.
• The system determines that a small child is present If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
in a child restraint. vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
• The system determines that a small child is present into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
in a booster seat. the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
the seat for a period of time. under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 1-10.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown Remove any additional material from the seat such as
child restraints. blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag restraint.
system or the passenger sensing system.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator check with your dealer/retailer.
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.

1-63
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask the passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
person to place the seatback in the fully upright position, Restraints” in the Index for additional information
then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, about the importance of proper restraint use.
with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position for way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
two to three minutes. This will allow the system to detect This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
that person and then enable the right front passenger’s system to turn the airbag(s) off for some adult size
frontal airbag. occupants. If this happens, just let the belt go back
all the way and start again.

1-64
 A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
{CAUTION: seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it equipment other than any that GM has approved for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
means that something may be wrong with the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66 for more
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the information about modifications that can affect
vehicle serviced promptly, because an how the system operates.
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more on this, including
{CAUTION:
important safety information.
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.

1-65
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Adding Equipment to Your
Vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
manual have information about servicing your vehicle from working properly?
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
page 7-16. frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
{CAUTION: of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is or pillar garnish trim, rearview mirror, front sensors,
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring can
airbag can still inflate during improper service. affect the operation of the airbag system.
You can be injured if you are close to an airbag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure
which includes sensors that are part of the
to follow proper service procedures, and make
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing
sure the person performing work for you is
system may not operate properly if the original
qualified to do so. seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery
or trim designed for a different vehicle.

1-66
Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with this will affect my airbag system?
the operation of the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper deployment of the A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
sensing system from properly turning off the Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
System on page 1-61. Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
If you have any questions about this, you should In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
contact Customer Assistance before you modify have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-76
for additional important information.

1-67
Restraint System Check Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
Checking the Restraint Systems maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-33 for more information.
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
and anchorages are working properly.
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt For the location of the airbag modules, see What
system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-59.
safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip See your dealer/retailer for service.
apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a
new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-32 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-103.

1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a Crash After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer/
{CAUTION: retailer to have your safety belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
not properly protect the person using it, system parts.
resulting in serious injury or even death in New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
a crash. To help make sure your restraint belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
systems are working properly after a crash, at the time of the crash.
have them inspected and any necessary If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
replacements made as soon as possible. system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33.

1-69
✍ NOTES

1-70
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-22
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4 Starting the Engine .......................................2-22
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-24
Operation ...................................................2-5 Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-24
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7 Active Fuel Management™ .............................2-25
Door Locks ....................................................2-7 Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-26
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8 Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-29
Delayed Locking .............................................2-8 Parking Brake ..............................................2-33
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-9 Shifting Into PARK (P) ...................................2-34
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-11 Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-36
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-37
Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................2-12 Engine Exhaust ............................................2-37
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-38
Windows ........................................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-14 Mirrors ...........................................................2-39
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15 Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-39
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-39
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16 OnStar® and Compass ...............................2-39
Passlock® (U. S. Only) ..................................2-17 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-18 OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
PASS-Key® III+ Operation (Canada Only) .........2-18 Display ....................................................2-41
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-20 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-20 Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-44
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-21

2-1
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-46 Storage Areas ................................................2-57
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-47 Glove Box ...................................................2-57
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-47 Overhead Console ........................................2-57
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-48 Center Console Storage .................................2-57
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-48 Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-58
OnStar® System .............................................2-48 Rear Floor Storage Lid ..................................2-59
Convenience Net ..........................................2-59
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-52 Cargo Cover ................................................2-59
Universal Home Remote System .....................2-52 Cargo Tie Downs ..........................................2-60
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With One Triangular LED) ...........................2-52 Sunroof .........................................................2-60

2-2
Keys

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.

This vehicle has keys that can be used for the ignition
and door lock that will fit with either side up.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer/retailer
provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a
key code number.

2-3
The key code number tells your dealer/retailer or a This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
number in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will be 1. This device may not cause interference.
able to have new ones made easily using this number.
Your selling dealer/retailer should also have this 2. This device must accept any interference received,
number. including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Changes or modifications to this system by other than
Be sure you have spare keys. an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If you ever get locked out of your vehicle, call the
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
Program on page 7-8. This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) • Check the distance. You may be too far from your
System vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. try again.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
1. This device may not cause interference. necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in
2. This device must accept any interference received, this section.
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.

2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) You can program different feedback settings through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
System Operation see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-49.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock Q (Lock): Press Q to lock all the doors.
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
Press Q again within three seconds and the
away using the RKE transmitter supplied with your
vehicle. horn will chirp.
There are other conditions which can affect the L (Panic): Press L to make the horn sound. The
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4. This can be turned off by pressing L again, by
K (Unlock): Press K to waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.
unlock the driver’s door. The
parking lamps will flash and
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
the interior lights will come Vehicle
on. Press K a second time Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
within three seconds to transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is
unlock all the doors. lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be re-coded
to match the new transmitter. The lost transmitter will no
longer work after the new transmitters are re-coded.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters
matched to it.

2-5
Battery Replacement To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do the
following:
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB # BATTERY
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY
FOB # BATTERY LOW” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-53 for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.

1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,

thin object inserted into the slot between the
covers of the transmitter housing.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery. Replace with a CR2032
or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.

2-6
Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the remote keyless entry system.
You can use your key to unlock your door from
Door Locks the outside.

{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive. You can lock or unlock the door from the inside by
• Young children who get into unlocked sliding the manual lever forward or rearward. When the
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child door is unlocked, you can see a red area on the lever.
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
The manual lever on each door works only that
suffer permanent injuries or even death
door’s lock.
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.

2-7
Power Door Locks Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the doors and the
The power door lock
liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless
switches are located on
entry system.
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door armrests. The first press of the power door lock switch or lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the
driver’s door open will activate the delay locking. A chime
will sound. All doors and the liftgate can be reopened for
up to five seconds from the time the last door is closed.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors
will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by using
the power door lock switch or by pressing the lock button
on the optional remote keyless entry transmitter a
Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors. To unlock second time.
the doors, press the other side of the switch.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will not
lock the doors. See Lockout Protection on page 2-11.
You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off. If the
feature is turned off, the doors will lock immediately when
a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry
transmitter lock button is pressed.

2-8
Programming Delayed Locking The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission
To turn the delayed locking feature on or off, do the is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
following: to program your door locks differently than the factory
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the setting. Choose one of the two programming options
driver’s door in the lock position. listed previously before entering the program mode.
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock To enter the program mode, do the following:
button twice.
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now be off. signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
If the feature was off, it will now be on. it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with
Programmable Automatic Door the key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
Locks lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock 30-second program timer will begin.
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
power door locks. You can program this feature through
locks. Select one of the two programming options
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
listed previously, and press the lock side of the
method. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-58.
power door lock switch to cycle through the lock
Programmable Locking Feature options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the 30-second limit,
Following are the two locking modes that can be the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the
programmed: horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
out of PARK (P). procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter
the programming mode.
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).

2-9
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the To enter the program mode you need to do the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and following:
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you 1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the it there while you perform the next step.
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified. 2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
See your dealer for more information. key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
Programmable Unlocking Feature lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
The following is the list of available programming
options: 3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is listed above, and press the unlock side of the power
shifted into PARK (P). door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking
options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is programming. If you exceed the 30-second limit,
shifted into PARK (P). the locks will automatically lock and unlock and
the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
from the ignition. procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is shifted unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
to PARK (P). The following instructions detail how to you are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
program your door locks differently than the factory switches are not pressed while in the programming
setting. Choose one of the four programming options mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not
listed previously before entering the program mode. be modified.
See your dealer for more information.

2-10
Rear Door Security Locks The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use. If you want to open
Your vehicle may have this feature. You can lock the the rear door while the security lock is on, unlock the
rear doors so they cannot be opened from the inside by door and open the door from the outside.
passengers. To use one of these locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a security Lockout Protection
lock lever located on the inside edge of each
rear door. This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open
2. Move the lever down to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
to engage the security If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
lock. Move the lever and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock
up to disengage and then the driver’s door will unlock.
the security lock.

3. Close the door.

2-11
Liftgate/Liftglass Liftgate Release
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote
{CAUTION: Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
The liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is
unlocked.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO) Press the button on the liftglass to open it. To open the
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the center of
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and the liftgate. When the liftgate is opened, the liftglass
will lock after a short delay.
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable Emergency Release for Opening
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
Liftgate
• Make sure all other windows are shut. 1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
• Turn the fan on your climate control system liftgate in the center, to expose the access hole in
the trim panel.
to its highest speed and select the control
setting that will force outside air into your 2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the
vehicle. See “Climate Control System” in trim panel.
the Index. 3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.
• If you have air outlets on or under the Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
instrument panel, open them all the way.
4. Reinstall the trim plug.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-37.

2-12
Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.

2-13
Power Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or The controls for the power windows are located on
other controls or even make the vehicle move. the armrest on each of the side doors. With power
The windows will function with the keys in the windows, the switches operate the windows when the
ignition and they could be seriously injured ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained
or killed if caught in the path of a closing Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22. The driver’s door
children. also has a switch for each of the passenger’s windows.
When there are children in the rear seat Press down the top of the switch to lower the window
use the window lockout button to prevent and pull up on the switch to raise the window. If you hold
unintentional operation of the windows. the switch down for three to seven seconds after the
window has been completely lowered or raised,
the window will not operate for about 15 seconds.

2-14
Express-Down Window Sun Visors
AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and front Sun Visors with Slide Rod
passenger’s window switches have an express-down
feature that allows you to lower the window without Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
holding the switch down. Press down briefly on the down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center
driver’s or front passenger’s window switch labeled mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side to cover
AUTO to activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap the driver or passenger side of the front window. Swing
the switch to open the window slightly. The express-down the sun visor to the side to cover the side window. It can
feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top also be moved along the rod from side-to-side in this
of the switch. position.

Window Lockout Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull-out

Extension
o (Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature to
prevent passengers from operating the power windows. Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
The lockout switch is located in front of the window down to block glare. Pull the sun visor extender out
switches on the driver’s door. A light in the lockout for additional coverage. Detach the sun visor from the
switch will come on to show that the switch has been center mount and swing it to the side to cover the
activated. Press the lockout switch again to return side window.
to normal operation.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror.
You may have to lift a cover to expose the mirror.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps.
The lamps will turn off when the cover is closed.

2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems To operate the system:

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. 1. Open the door.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent 2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
impossible to steal. The security light should flash.
The system will not activate if the doors are locked
Content Theft-Deterrent with the key or manual door lock.
3. Close all doors. The security light should turn off
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
system.
until the security light turns off.
The security light is If a locked door is opened without the key or the RKE
located on the instrument transmitter, the alarm will go off. The headlamps
panel cluster. and parking lamps will flash for two minutes, and the
horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn off to save
the battery power.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• Always lock the vehicle using the door key after the
doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the RKE
transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way will
set off the alarm.
To turn off the alarm, press unlock on the RKE
transmitter or unlock any door with the key.

2-16
Testing the Alarm Passlock® (U. S. Only)
To test the alarm: Your vehicle has the Passlock® theft-deterrent system.
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system that
and open the driver’s door. enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the cylinder has been tampered with, the fuel system is
power door lock switch while the door is open, or disabled and the vehicle will not start.
with the RKE transmitter.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for about five seconds after the key is turned to ON/RUN.
the security light to go out.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
with the manual door lock and open the door. trying to restart the engine. Remember to release the
This should set off the alarm. key from START as soon as the engine starts.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch will If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
not work. needs service.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, off. However, your Passlock® system is not working
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-110. properly and must be serviced by your dealer/retailer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this time.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do You may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and
not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your Circuit Breakers on page 5-110. See your dealer/retailer
dealer/retailer. for service.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

2-17
PASS-Key® III+ PASS-Key® III+ Operation
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio (Canada Only)
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The system is automatically armed when the key
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: is removed from the ignition.

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
operation. The security light will come on if there is a problem
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer
1. This device may not cause interference. control unit in your vehicle. Only the correct key will
start the vehicle. If the key is ever damaged, you may
2. This device must accept any interference received, not be able to start your vehicle.
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

2-18
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
start and the security light comes on, there may be only a dealer/retailer can service the theft-deterrent
a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn system to have new keys made. To program additional
the ignition off and try again. keys you will require two current driver’s keys.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to To program a new key do the following:
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, 1. Verify that the new key has PK3+ stamped on it.
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-110. If the engine still 2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs and start the engine. If the engine will not start
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be see your dealer/retailer for service.
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
theft-deterrent system and have a new key made. LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to 4. Insert the second current driver’s key in the ignition
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement and start the engine within ten seconds of removing
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. the previous key. If the engine will not start see
The following procedure is for programming additional your dealer/retailer for service.
keys only.

2-19
 5. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key. Insert the key
Starting and Operating Your
to be programmed and turn it to ON within Vehicle
ten seconds of removing the previous key.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. New Vehicle Break-In
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
to be programmed. break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
If the security light comes on and stays on while driving, you follow these guidelines:
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn it off. • Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
The theft-deterrent system, however, is not working the first 500 miles (805 km).
properly and must be serviced by your dealer/retailer.
Your vehicle is not protected by the theft-deterrent • Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
system at this time. slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. to brake or slow the vehicle.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle. linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-45 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.

2-20
Ignition Positions A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
Use the key to turn the
to LOCK/OFF.
ignition switch to four
different positions. If the steering wheel is locked, move it from right to left
and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If none of
this works, then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when
the engine is off.
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the
ACC/ACCESSORY may drain the battery and prevent
your vehicle from starting. Do not operate your vehicle
in the ACC/ACCESSORY for a long period of time.
Press the regular brake pedal, and turn the ignition C (ON/RUN): This is the position for driving.
to ON/RUN to shift out of PARK (P).
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
with your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.
If none of this works, then your vehicle needs D (START): This position starts the engine.
service.

2-21
Key In the Ignition These features will work when the key is in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside. If you ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, these features continue to
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a work for up to 20 minutes, or until a door is opened.
chime will sound, when you open the driver’s door.
Remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission. Starting the Engine
Also, always remember to lock the doors. Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the Your engine will not start in any other position – this
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
extended period of time.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
20 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Overhead Console
• Sunroof (if equipped)

2-22
Starting Procedure 2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as and holding it there as you hold the key in START
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
up and lubricate all moving parts. the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
System. This feature assists in starting the engine the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
to the START position, and then released when the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue up and lubricates all moving parts.
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. parts or accessories, you could change the way the
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
position. warranty.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of

time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.

2-23
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
move farther away from the standard position, but can Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
move closer for better pedal reach. starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
operate.
above 0°F (−18°C).
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
the steering column. 1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment next to the battery box
facing the engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.

Press the switch forward or backward to move the

pedals closer or farther away from you.

2-24
 Active Fuel Management™
{CAUTION: Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the on your driving conditions.
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat When less power is required, such as cruising at a
and cause a fire. You could be seriously constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achieve
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will better fuel economy. When greater power demands are
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
full-cylinder operation.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and

store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in?
The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle.
The dealer/retailer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.

2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different
{CAUTION:
positions for your gear shift
lever. It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-34. If you
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
best position to use when you start the engine page 4-45.
because your vehicle cannot move easily.

2-26
 To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
{CAUTION: see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-33.
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll — even if your shift lever is NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
Drive on page 2-29. See Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-34.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
apply the regular brakes first and then press the shift vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lever button before you can shift from PARK (P) when lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of shift into a drive gear while your engine is
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the running at high speed.
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
of PARK (P) on page 2-36. with the engine running at high speed may damage
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. the transmission. The repairs would not be
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
is moving forward could damage the transmission. running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.

2-27
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed even
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes. You can
If you need more power for passing, and you are: use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the To shift to the SECOND (2) position, you must first press
accelerator all the way down. the large button on the shift handle. While the button is
pressed, move the shifter in the SECOND (2) position.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power. You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed even
Control on page 4-12. more than SECOND (2) without using your brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving.
vehicle is moving forward, the transmission will not shift
You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or,
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission
shifts too often. To shift to the FIRST (1) position, you must first press
the large button on the shift handle. While the button is
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving. pressed, move the shifter in the FIRST (1) position.
It reduces vehicle speed more than DRIVE (D) without
using your brakes. You might choose THIRD (3) instead Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding roads, one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
gears and when going down a steep hill. covered by your warranty. If you are stuck, do not
spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes
To shift to the THIRD (3) position, you must first press to hold the vehicle in place.
the large button on the shift handle. While the button
is pressed, move the shifter in the THIRD (3) position.

2-28
Four-Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, the engine’s driving If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, the transfer case
power can be sent to all four wheels for extra traction. knob is located to the right of the steering wheel on the
To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel drive, you instrument panel.
must be familiar with its operation. Read the part that
follows before using four-wheel drive. You should Use this knob to shift into
use Two-Wheel High for most normal driving conditions. and out of four-wheel drive

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in

Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time.
Notice: If you continually drive your vehicle with
the transfer case in AUTO or Four-Wheel Drive, you
could shorten the life of the transfer case or the
Four-Wheel Drive system. The selector switch 2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in
should be left in Two-Wheel Drive High mode. Only most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not
use AUTO and Four-Wheel Drive when you need engaged in two-wheel drive. It also provides the best
extra traction such as in wet or slippery road fuel economy.
conditions.

2-29
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road conditions are variable. When {CAUTION:
driving your vehicle in automatic four-wheel drive, the
front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent to
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
the rear wheels. When the vehicle senses a loss of
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
traction, the system will automatically engage four-wheel
drive. Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
economy than Two-Wheel High. else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
4 m (Four-Wheel High): This setting should be used case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on
when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or page 2-33.
icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting also
engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case
4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engages to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.
See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-40
your front axle and delivers extra torque. It sends for more information.
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
this setting if you are driving off-road in deep sand, An indicator light in the knob will show you which
deep mud, and climbing or descending steep hills. position the transfer case is in. The indicator lights will
come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will
stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take your
vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator light will
flash while shifting the transfer case. It will stay on when
the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer case
cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the last
chosen setting.
If the service Four-Wheel Drive Warning Light on the
instrument panel cluster stays on, you should take
your vehicle to your dealer for service. See Service
Four-Wheel Drive Warning Light on page 3-47 for
further information.

2-30
Shifting Into Four-Wheel High or Automatic unless your vehicle is moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h)
Four-Wheel Drive and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After
30 seconds, the transfer case will return to the
Turn the knob to Four-Wheel High or Automatic setting last chosen.
Four-Wheel Drive. This can be done at any speed
unless you are shifting out of Four-Wheel Low. Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Low
The indicator light will flash while shifting. It will To shift from Four-Wheel Low to Four-Wheel High, Auto
remain on when the shift is complete. Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High, your vehicle must
Shifting Into Two-Wheel High be stopped or moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running.
Turn the knob to Two-Wheel High. This can be done at The preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel
any speed unless you are shifting out of Four-Wheel Low. Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to Four-Wheel High,
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Low Auto Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High. You must
To shift to Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle’s engine must wait for the Four-Wheel High, Auto Four-Wheel Drive, or
be running and the vehicle must be stopped or moving Two-Wheel High indicator light to stop flashing and stay
less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission in off before shifting your transmission into gear.
NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting into If the knob is turned to Four Wheel-High, Auto
Four-Wheel Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 or Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High when your
2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to Four-Wheel vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel High,
Low. You must wait for the Four-Wheel Low indicator Auto Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High indicator
light to stop flashing and stay on before shifting the light will flash for 30 seconds. It will not complete
transmission into gear. the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than
If you turn the knob to Four-Wheel Low when your vehicle 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel Low indicator
light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift

2-31
Shifting into NEUTRAL Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
Before shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first To shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL, do the
make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll. following:
1. Set the parking brake. 1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Start the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.
4. Turn the transfer case knob to the desired position
5. Turn the transfer case knob all of the way past (Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel High, or Auto
Four-Wheel Low and hold it there for a minimum of Four-Wheel Drive).
10 seconds. The neutral indicator light will come on.
5. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,
6. With the engine running, shift the transmission to the indicator light will go out.
REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift the
transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second, to 6. Release the parking brake.
ensure that the transfer case is in NEUTRAL. 7. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
7. Turn the engine off, by turning the key to desired position.
ACC/ACCESSORY.
8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

2-32
Parking Brake If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-38.
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
pedal down with your overheat the brake system and cause premature
foot and pull up on wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake lever the parking brake is fully released and the brake
located between the seats. warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-45.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake

pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you
can press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the
button in as you move the parking brake lever all the
way down.

2-33
Shifting Into PARK (P) To shift into PARK (P):
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set
the parking brake.
{CAUTION: 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the side of the shift lever and pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the 3. Turn the ignition key to OFF/LOCK.
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. You know
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle your vehicle is in PARK (P) if the key can be
can move suddenly. You or others could be removed from the ignition.
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. With four-wheel drive,
your vehicle will be free to roll — even if your
shift lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case
is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case
is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-29. Always put the
shift lever fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-45.

2-34
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
Running parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
{CAUTION: the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pressing
the button on the console shift lever. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not fully locked into
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with PARK (P).
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in Torque Lock
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
free to roll – even if your lever is in PARK (P) – if vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So be sure in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull
the transfer case is in a drive gear – not the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-29. lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
running, it could overheat and even catch fire. PARK (P) on page 2-34.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
your vehicle with the engine running unless PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
you have to.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-35
Shifting Out of PARK (P) If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
This vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system. battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-42 for more
The shift lock release is designed to: information.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully 1. Apply the brake pedal.
released, and
2. Press the shift lever button.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
and the regular brake pedal is applied. If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
The shift lock release is always functional except in the 1. Fully release the shift lever button.
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) 2. Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever
battery. button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.

2-36
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: You might have exhaust coming in if:

• The exhaust system sounds strange or
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust different.
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not • Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other • Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
things that can burn.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Engine Exhaust • Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
{CAUTION: If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas • Drive it only with all the windows down to
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or blow out any CO; and
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. • Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
CAUTION: (Continued)

2-37
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you {CAUTION:
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
{CAUTION: the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
Idling the engine with the climate control is running unless you have to. If you have left
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into the engine running, the vehicle can move
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under suddenly. You or others could be injured.
Engine Exhaust on page 2-37. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
PARK (P).
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-30.

2-38
 Manual Rearview Mirror with
{CAUTION: OnStar®
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, it will adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
be free to roll — even if the shift lever is in vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or
PARK (P) — if the transfer case is in down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps
is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. behind you. Move the lever to the right for nighttime
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-29. use and to the left for daytime use.
There may also be three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer/retailer for
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
more information on the system and how to subscribe to
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-34.
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-48 for more
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on information on the services OnStar® provides.
page 4-45.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Mirrors with OnStar® and Compass
Manual Rearview Mirror Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass.
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position, There may be three additional buttons for the OnStar®
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your system. See your dealer/retailer for more information
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment See OnStar® System on page 2-48 for more information
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the about the services OnStar® provides.
lamps behind you. Move the lever to the right for
nighttime use and to the left for daytime use. O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
2-39
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
The automatic dimming mirror comes on each time the be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
ignition is turned to start. To turn the automatic dimming Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna
feature off or back on, press the on/off button. The mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C or
indicator light on the mirror is lit when the automatic CAL appears in the compass window, the compass may
dimming feature is on. need to be reset or calibrated.
Compass Operation Compass Variance
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
on or off. magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror
There is a compass display in the window in the upper is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
right corner of the mirror face. necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
Compass Calibration certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
Press and hold the on/off button to activate the compass compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
calibration mode. CAL will be displayed in the compass variance, your compass could give false readings.
window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.

2-40
To adjust for compass variance: 3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
1. Find your current location and variance zone window on the mirror by pressing the on/off button.
number on the following zone map. Once you find your zone number, release the button.
After about four seconds, the mirror will return to the
compass display, and the new zone number will be
set. If C or CAL appears in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration. See “Compass
Calibration” listed previously.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, an
automatic dimming mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and
the outside temperature will both appear in the display
at the same time.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until the zone
number is displayed. The number shown is the P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
current zone number.

2-41
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the
following:
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
1. Press and hold the on/off button until either a
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
flashing F or C appears.
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
and hold the on/off button until the green light
in and the display will return.
comes on, indicating that the mirror is in automatic
dimming mode. If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by extended period of time, please consult your dealer.
pressing and holding the on/off button until the Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
green indicator light turns off. the temperature is normal.

Temperature and Compass Display Compass Variance

Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
turn the compass/temperature display on or off. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
the compass. For more information on calibration, Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
see below. cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.

2-42
To adjust for compass variance, do the following: 3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
1. Find your current location and variance zone zone number appears in the display. Release the
number on the following zone map. button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described next.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, press
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a and hold the on/off button until CAL is displayed.
zone number appear in the display. The compass The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
is now in zone mode. in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.

2-43
Passenger Airbag Indicator Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons. on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display the operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the 1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to
passenger airbag is enabled. For more information, the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press
see Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61. and hold the on/off button until the green light
Cleaning the Mirror comes on, indicating that the mirror is in automatic
dimming mode.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar 2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray pressing and holding the on/off button until the
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause green indicator light turns off.
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Temperature Display
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
with Compass and Temperature TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly, will
toggle the temperature reading on and off. To alternate
Display the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and
Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button until the display
If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic mirror, blinks F and C. Press and release the TEMP button to
it will, when on, automatically dim to the proper level toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings.
to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark. After approximately four seconds of inactivity, the display
The mirror also includes a display in the upper will stop blinking and display the last selection made.
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading If an abnormal reading is displayed, for an extended
and the outside temperature will both appear in period of time, please consult your dealer. Under certain
the display at the same time. The dual display can be circumstances, a delay in updating the temperature is
turned on or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP normal.
or the COMP button.

2-44
Compass Operation In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, press
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass and hold the COMP button until CAL is displayed.
on or off.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
compass will show two character boxes for approximately reads a direction.
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading. Compass Variance
Compass Calibration The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
The compass may need calibration if one of the for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
following occurs: Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle. cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
• After approximately five seconds, the display between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
does not show a compass heading (N for North, north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
for example), there may be a strong magnetic field your compass could give false readings.
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.

2-45
To adjust for compass variance, do the following: Passenger Airbag Indicator
1. Find your current location and variance zone The mirror may be equipped with a passenger airbag
number on the following zone map. indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If the vehicle has this feature the mirror will display the
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger airbag is enabled. For more information
see Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61.

Cleaning the Mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Manual Mirrors

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you can see a
little of the side of your vehicle, and the area beside your
vehicle from a comfortable driving position. The mirrors
can be folded in to enter narrow areas. Return the mirrors
to the unfolded position before driving.
2. Press and hold the COMP button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

2-46
Outside Power Mirrors Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
Your vehicle may have this feature. The power mirror If the vehicle has this feature, the passenger’s outside
control is located on the driver’s door. mirror will adjust to a preset tilt position while the vehicle
Turn the control knob left or right to select the desired is in REVERSE (R) gear. Curb view assist may be useful
mirror. Then move the control knob to the left or right or when you are parallel parking. The mirror will return
to normal position when the vehicle is shifted out of
up or down to position the mirror so that you can see
a little of the outside of the vehicle. After adjusting REVERSE (R) gear. Automatic mirror movement in
either direction will follow a short delay.
the position of the mirrors, turn the knob to the center
off position so that the mirrors do not move. You may be able to turn this feature on or off through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
If the travel position in any direction of the mirror is
Customization on page 3-58.
reached, it will enter a ratcheting mode. This action is
harmless. It is a warning that the mirror can go no further.
To stop this action, back the mirror up by moving the
knob in the opposite direction.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.

2-47
Outside Convex Mirror OnStar® System

{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
before changing lanes. advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
surface is curved so more can be seen from the request emergency services be sent to your location.
driver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles, If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
look farther away than they really are. 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
Outside Heated Mirrors the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
Your vehicle may have this feature. When you operate
the rear window defogger, the defogger also warms the
heated driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview mirrors
to help clear them of ice, snow and condensation.

2-48
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and • Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar (If equipped)
Subscriber glove box literature. For more information,
visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar at • Link to Emergency Services
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY • Roadside Assistance
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak
with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. • Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles. • AccidentAssist

To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar • OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com. • GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Services • OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
minutes
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for • OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend
this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan. For more information, Directions & Connections Plan
press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some • All Safe and Sound Plan Services
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available until • Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
you register with OnStar. Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services

2-49
OnStar Hands-Free Calling OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-101
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid for more information.
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for
or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). more information.

OnStar Virtual Advisor

OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving a few
simple voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information (Only available in the continental U.S.).

2-50
How OnStar Service Works Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability available.
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press, (including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash, additional OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
information regarding the accident that your vehicle has Some examples are damage to important parts of your
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which your vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor feature weather or wireless phone network congestion.
of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends Your Responsibility
OnStar your GPS location so that we can provide you
with location-based services. Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a this means that your system is not functioning properly
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
also cannot work unless you are in a place where the subscription has expired. You can always press the
wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
has coverage, network capacity and reception when the is active.
service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.

2-51
Universal Home Remote Universal Home Remote System
System Operation (With One Triangular LED)

Universal Home Remote System

The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired This system provides a way to replace up to three
operation. remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
and home automation devices.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference. Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
2. This device must accept any interference received, reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
including interference that may cause undesired model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
operation of the device.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
Changes or modifications to this system by other than program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
an authorized service facility could void authorization to the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
use this equipment. person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.

2-52
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other To program up to three devices:
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
When programming a garage door, park outside of
the garage. Park directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage 1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the
door or gate you are programming. two outside buttons at the same time, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote indicator
It is recommended that a new battery be installed light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more will erase the factory settings or all previously
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. programmed buttons.
Programming the Universal Home Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
Remote System the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.
If you have questions or need help programming the 2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal
or go to www.homelink.com. Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator
Programming a garage door opener involves light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure by the manufacturer of your garage door opener
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, receiver (motor head unit).
the device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.

2-53
 3. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal 5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Home Remote button that you would like to use Remote button and observe the indicator light.
to control the garage door and the hand-held If the indicator light stays on continuously,
transmitter button. Do not release the Universal the programming is complete and your garage door
Home Remote button or the hand-held transmitter should move when the Universal Home Remote
button until Step 4 has been completed. button is pressed and released. You do not need to
Some entry gates and garage door openers may continue the programming Steps 6 through 8 and
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure can stop here.
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks
Programming” later in this section. rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant
4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote light, continue with the programming Steps 6
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after through 8.
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the It may be helpful to have another person available
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. to assist with the remaining steps.
Release both buttons.

2-54
 7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 8.
8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and
hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in
Step 3 to control the garage door, for two seconds,
and then release it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the same button a second time
for two seconds, and then release it. Again, if the
door does not move, press and hold the same button
a third time for two seconds, and then release.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the Universal
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed, Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1, as this will
locate inside the garage the garage door opener erase all previous programming from the Universal Home
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” Remote buttons.
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.

2-55
Gate Operator and Canadian Using Universal Home Remote
Programming Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
If you have questions or need help programming the button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
or go to www.homelink.com. Erasing Universal Home Remote
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter Buttons
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal Erase the programmed buttons when you sell or
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming. terminate your lease.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
to time out in the same manner.
Home Remote device:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with
the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. 2. Release both buttons.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.

2-56
Reprogramming a Single Universal Center Console Storage
Home Remote Button Pull the front lever on the center console while lifting the
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote top to open it.
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier The console has cupholders on the front and rear of the
in this section, beginning with Step 2. storage compartment.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote The console may also contain:
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6. • Rear Seat Audio Controls
• Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets
Storage Areas • Rear Climate Control
To open the center armrest compartment, lift the cover
Glove Box by pulling up on the latch handle located under the
front edge of the armrest.
To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lock and
unlock.

Overhead Console
Your vehicle may have this feature. The overhead
console may include reading lamps, a Universal
Home Remote and a sunroof switch. See Sunroof
on page 2-60 and Universal Home Remote System
on page 2-52 for more information.

2-57
Luggage Carrier To slide the crossrails to where you want them,
pull up on the lever on each side of the crossrail.
This releases the crossrail and allows you to slide it.
When the crossrail is where you want it, press down
{CAUTION: on the levers to lock it into place.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
If you try to carry something on top of your weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or hangs over
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress your vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you slats as far forward as possible and against the
drive along. This can cause you to lose side rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
control. What you are carrying could be Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
violently torn off, and this could cause you or loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
other drivers to have a collision, and of course capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry page 4-34.
something like this inside. But, never carry To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
something longer or wider than the luggage check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
carrier on top of your vehicle. is locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, place the
If your vehicle has a luggage carrier, it will allow you to crossrails at the following positions for wind noise
load things on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier reduction. Place one crossrail at the rear most point of
has side rails attached to the roof, places to use for tying the vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening
things down and may have sliding crossrails. These let of the rear door.
you load some other things on top of your vehicle, as long
as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.

2-58
Rear Floor Storage Lid Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Store small loads as far forward as possible.
{CAUTION: The net should not be used to store heavy loads.

If any removable convenience item is not Cargo Cover

secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
could be injured. Be sure to secure any such cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
item properly. To install the cargo cover:
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable located behind the rear seat.
storage lid. 2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with the
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
To remove the rear floor storage lid:
panel and release.
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover.
2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
4. Latch the posts into the sockets on the inside of the
3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from the forward vehicle to secure it.
mounting tabs.
To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applying
slight pressure to the latch until you hear it click.

2-59
To remove the cargo cover, do the following: Sunroof
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
roll it back up. The vehicle may have a power sliding sunroof. To open
or close the sunroof, the ignition must be turned to RUN,
2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must
pocket in the trim panel. be active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so page 2-22.
that you can remove the shade from the vehicle.
Press and release the
back of the control in the
{CAUTION: overhead console to
open the sunroof. Press
the front of the control
An improperly stored cargo cover could be to close the sunroof.
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you
put it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
Once the sunroof is closed, press the forward side of
the control to open the sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof has a sunshade which can be pulled
Cargo Tie Downs forward to block sun rays. If it is in the closed position,
Cargo tie-downs located in the rear of the vehicle are it will open when the sunroof opens.
used to secure small loads.

2-60
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-20
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-20
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6 Climate Controls ............................................3-21
Horn .............................................................3-6 Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-21
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-23
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-28
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7 Rear Climate Control System .........................3-28
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-30
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-31
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-32
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-10 Trip Odometer ..............................................3-32
Headlamp Washer ........................................3-11 Tachometer .................................................3-32
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11 Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-32
Headlamps ..................................................3-14 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-33
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-34
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15 Charging System Light ..................................3-36
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15 Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-37
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-16 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-38
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17 Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-39
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-17 StabiliTrak® Service Light ...............................3-39
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-17 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..............................3-40
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-18 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-40
Exit Lighting .................................................3-18 Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-41
Reading Lamps ............................................3-18 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-41
Electric Power Management ...........................3-18 Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-44
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19 Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-45

3-1
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Security Light ...............................................3-46 Audio System(s) .............................................3-65
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-46 Setting the Clock ..........................................3-66
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-46 Radio(s) ......................................................3-66
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-47 Using an MP3 ..............................................3-82
Service Four-Wheel Drive Warning Light ..........3-47 XM Radio Messages .....................................3-86
Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-47 Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-87
Gate Ajar Light .............................................3-48 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System ...........3-87
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-48 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-100
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-49 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-101
Check Gas Cap Light ....................................3-49 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-101
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-49 Radio Reception .........................................3-102
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-50 Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................3-103
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-53 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-103
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-58 Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-103

3-2
✍ NOTES

3-3
Instrument Panel Overview

3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps on K. Driver Information Center (DIC) Steering Wheel
page 3-14. Dome Lamp Override Button. Controls. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
See Dome Lamp Override on page 3-17. Instrument on page 3-49.
Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument Panel L. Transfer Case Controls. See “Automatic Transfer
Brightness on page 3-17. Fog Lamp Button Case” under Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-29.
(If Equipped). See Fog Lamps on page 3-16.
M. Shift Lever and StabiliTrak® (If Equipped) Button.
B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-28. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-34 and
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. N. Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on
D. OnStar and Audio Steering Wheel Controls. page 3-20.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-101. O. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel Outlet(s) on page 3-20.
Cluster on page 3-31. P. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-33.
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering Q. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See “Rear Window
Wheel Controls on page 3-101. Washer/Wiper” under Windshield Washer on
G. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-21. page 3-9.
H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-65. R. Rear Window Defogger. See “Rear Window
I. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control Defogger” under Dual Climate Control System on
System on page 3-21. page 3-21 and Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 3-23.
J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-57.

3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers Horn
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They also To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
let the police and other emergency vehicles know you steering wheel pad.
have a problem.

The hazard warning Tilt Wheel

flasher button is located
on top of the steering The tilt lever is on the
column. outboard side of the
steering column, under
the turn signal lever.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your vehicle’s Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you to
turn signals will not work. change the position, then release the lever to lock.

Other Warning Devices

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.

3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward and two downward
positions.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever returns automatically.

An arrow on the instrument

panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.

The lever on the left side of the steering column

includes the following: To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until your lane
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals change is completed. The lever returns by itself when
• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer released.
If the arrows flash more quickly than normal, a signal
• Flash-to-Pass Feature
bulb could be burned out. Replace the bulb. If the arrows
• N Windshield Wipers do not go on at all when you signal a turn, check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-110
• J Windshield Washer and check for burned-out bulbs.
• I Cruise Control If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a turn signal flasher is used. With this
flasher installed, the signal indicator flashes even if a turn
signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and rear turn
signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working.

3-7
Turn Signal On Chime Flash-to-Pass
A chime sounds if the turn signal has been on This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn signal lever to off. signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer position.
To change the headlamps from low to high beam, To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return release it.
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on
toward you. Then release it. low beam, the high-beam headlamps turn on. They
will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
When the high beams are
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
on, this indicator light on
comes on. Release the lever to return to normal
the instrument panel
operation.
cluster will also be on.

3-8
Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer
8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist, for a single wiping L (Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluid on
cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. the windshield, press the windshield washer paddle.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If more wipes are The wipers will clear the window and then either stop
needed, hold the band on mist longer. or return to your preset speed.

9 (Off): Move the band to off, to stop the wipers.

N (Windshield Wipers): Turn the band to control the

{CAUTION:
windshield wipers.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
The wiper speed can be set for a long or short delay until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay. blocking your vision.

For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from
you to the first solid band past the delay settings. For
high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the second
solid band past the delay settings. To stop the wipers,
move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

3-9
Rear Window Wiper/Washer To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,
or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2. For
steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the wiper off,
turn the control to 0.
{CAUTION: To wash the rear window, press the washer symbol
located in the center of the control.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
The rear window washer uses the fluid from the same
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the reservoir as the windshield washer. However, the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, rear window washer runs out of fluid before the
blocking your vision. windshield washer. If you can wash your windshield
but not your rear window, check the fluid level.

The rear window/washer

control is located to the
right of the steering wheel
on the instrument panel.

3-10
Headlamp Washer Cruise Control
Your vehicle may have a Your vehicle has cruise
headlamp washer system. control. The controls are
The button to operate located on the end of the
this feature is located on turn signal/multifunction
the instrument panel lever.
and functions separately
from your other washer
systems.

To wash your headlamps, press the headlamp washer

button briefly and release to activate the system.
R (On): Move the switch to this position to turn the
cruise control system on.

S (Resume/Accelerate): Move the switch to this

position to resume a set speed or to accelerate.

T (Set): Press this button, located at the end of the

lever, to set a speed.

9 (Off): Move the switch to this position to turn the

cruise control system off and cancel memory of a
set speed.

3-11
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long {CAUTION:
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h). If you leave your cruise control on when you
If you apply the brakes, the cruise control shuts off. are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
{CAUTION: Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do Setting Cruise Control
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic. 1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery 2. Get up to the speed you want.
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire 3. Press the set button at the end of the lever and
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and release it.
you could lose control. Do not use cruise 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
control on slippery roads. The accelerator pedal will not go down.
Some vehicles have
a cruise light on the
instrument panel cluster
that will come on when the
cruise control is engaged.

3-12
Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed Control
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts Press in the set button at the end of the lever until you
off the cruise control. But you do not need to reset it. reach the desired speed, then release it. Each time
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or you do this, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
more, you can move the cruise control switch briefly
from on to resume/accelerate. Passing Another Vehicle While Using
You will go right back up to the previously chosen Cruise Control
speed and stay there. Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate, the vehicle When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle
keeps going faster until you release the switch or will slow down to the cruise control speed set earlier.
apply the brakes. So unless you want to go faster,
do not hold the switch at resume/accelerate. Using Cruise Control on Hills
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise How well your cruise control works on hills depends
Control upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
There are two ways to go to a higher speed: accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
speed. Press the button at the end of the lever, keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
then release the button and the accelerator pedal. takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
You will now cruise at the higher speed. be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/ steep hills.
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
desired speed and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

3-13
Ending Cruise Control c (Off): Turn the knob to this symbol and release
There are three ways to turn off the cruise control: it to turn off the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the
Automatic Headlamps (AHS). An indicator illuminates
• Step lightly on the brake pedal. when the position is selected. This position is not
• Move the cruise switch to off, or available for vehicles first sold in Canada.
• Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N). ? (Automatic DRL/AHS): Turn the knob to this
symbol to put the system into automatic headlamp mode.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, ; (Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to this symbol
the cruise control set speed memory is erased. to turn on the parking lamps, as well as the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
Headlamps • Taillamps

The exterior lamps knob • License Plate Lamps

is located on your • Instrument Panel Lights
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel. 2 (Headlamps): Turn the knob to this symbol
to turn on the headlamps, as well as the following:
• Parking Lamps
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights

3-14
Headlamps on Reminder When the DRL are on, only the headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps will not
A reminder tone sounds when the headlamps or parking be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
lamps are manually turned on, if the driver’s door is When it begins to get dark, the headlamps automatically
open and the ignition is in LOCK or ACC. To turn the switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
tone off, turn the knob all the way counterclockwise.
In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the Automatic Headlamp System
ignition key is in LOCK.
When it is dark enough outside, the Automatic
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Headlamp System turns on the headlamps when the
vehicle is started and after the transaxle has been
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier shifted out of the PARK (P) position. The headlamps,
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. taillamps, sidemarker, and parking lamps will come
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, on. The instrument panel lights and radio lights will
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods also turn on at normal brightness. Once on, the system
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional DRL remains on during these conditions even if the vehicle
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. is shifted back into PARK (P).
The DRL system makes the headlamps come on at The vehicle has a light sensor on the top of the
reduced brightness when the following conditions instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered or the
are met: system may come on whenever the ignition is on and
the vehicle is shifted out of the PARK (P) position.
• The ignition is on.
The system could also turn on the lamps when driving
• The exterior lamps knob is in automatic through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
headlamp mode. or a tunnel. This is normal.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P).

3-15
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and Fog Lamps
nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
and the automatic headlamp systems, so that driving Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not conditions. The ignition must be in RUN for the
affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp fog lamps to work.
system are only affected when the light sensor sees a
change in lighting lasting longer than the delay. The fog lamp button is
located on the instrument
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
panel to the right of the
headlamp system comes on after the transmission is
exterior lamps knob.
shifted out of PARK (P). Once you leave the garage,
it will take about one minute for the automatic headlamp
system to change to DRL if it is light outside. During
that delay, the instrument panel cluster might not be
as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel
brightness control is in the full bright position.
If the vehicle is running and the automatic headlamp
system is already on, it can be turned off by turning
and releasing the headlamp control at the off position. Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
The automatic headlamp system stays off until you button again to turn them off. A light glows near the
turn and release the headlamp control at the off button while the fog lamps are on. Fog lamps turn off
position again. See Headlamps on page 3-14. whenever the high-beam headlamps are on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.

3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness Dome Lamp Override
Press the knob located The dome override button
next to the exterior lamps is located below the
knob to extend it. exterior lamps knob.

Turn the knob to adjust the instrument panel lights. Turn To turn the dome lamps off, press the button. The dome
the knob all the way up to turn on the interior lamps. lamps will remain off when a door is open. This will
Press the knob back into its stored position when override the illuminated entry feature unless you use the
you are not using it. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
vehicle.
Dome Lamps To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door button again. The dome lamps come on when a door is
unless the dome lamp override is pressed in. opened.

3-17
Entry Lighting Electric Power Management
The vehicle has entry lighting. The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
When any door is opened, the dome lamps come on as
long as the dome override lamp override button is not of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
pressed in. When all the doors are closed, the lamps performance and extended life of the battery.
stay on for a short period of time and then turn off When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
automatically. If you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
transmitter to unlock the vehicle, the interior lamps come the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
on for a short time whether or not the dome lamp override to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
is on. gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up
or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an
Exit Lighting alert will be displayed.
With exit lighting, the interior lamps come on when you The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
remove the key from the ignition. If the dome override loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
is off, these lamps stay on for a short period of time because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
and then go out. fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Reading Lamps A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
The reading lamps are located in the front console. lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
Press the lens on the lamps to turn the reading lamps high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
on or off. loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.

3-18
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the Battery Run-Down Protection
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, and vanity
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands when the ignition is off. This will keep the battery
of some accessories. from running down.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the return to normal operation:
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or
• Shut off all lamps and close all doors.
Service Battery Charging System. If this message is • Turn the ignition key to RUN.
displayed, it is recommended that the driver reduce the
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and
electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC Warnings
headlamps under most circumstances, if they are left on.
and Messages on page 3-53.
If you would like to turn them back on, turn the exterior
lamps knob.

3-19
Accessory Power Outlet(s) Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular from the plug because the power outlets are
telephone or CB radio. designed for accessory power plugs only.
Your vehicle has three accessory power outlets.
There are two outlets located below the climate Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
controls and one outlet is on the rear of the center
floor console. Your vehicle may have this feature. The ashtray is
removable and fits into the front cupholder.
Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet.
Be sure to put the cover back on when not using the Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
accessory power outlet. items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
with the accessory power outlet and could result
ashtray.
in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer for additional information To remove the ashtray, pull the covered bin out of the
on the accessory power outlets. cupholder.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
vehicle may damage it or keep other components When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
from working as they should. The repairs would not Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes. the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
electrical equipment. element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
the proper installation instructions included with the equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
equipment. of 20 amperes.

3-20
Climate Controls To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
Dual Climate Control System panel outlets.

With this system you can control the heating, cooling,

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the air
and ventilation for your vehicle. to the instrument panel outlets; then directs most of
the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper vents
and warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with a little air directed to the windshield
and the side window outlets. The recirculation button
cannot be selected while in floor mode.
@ (Recirculation): Recirculation mode is used to
recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. When this button
is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on
to let you know that it is active. Use this mode to help
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or prevent outside odors and/or dust from entering your
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the vehicle or to help cool the air inside of your vehicle more
fan speed. If the knob is in off mode, outside air still quickly. The air conditioning compressor will also come
enters the vehicle, and is directed based on the position on when this mode is activated. While in recirculation
of the mode knob. The temperature can still be adjusted mode, the windows may fog when the weather is cold
using the temperature knob. and damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or
defrost mode and increase fan speed.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle. Defog and defrost modes are described later in this
section.

3-21
Driver’s Side Temperature Lever: The lever on the Defogging and Defrosting
left side of the climate control panel is used to raise
or lower the temperature on the driver’s side of Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
the vehicle. Slide the lever up or down to adjust (moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
the temperature. can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to choose from to clear
Passenger’s Side Temperature Lever: The lever on fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode
the right side of the climate control panel is used to raise to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
or lower the temperature on the passenger’s side of passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
the vehicle. Slide the lever up or down to adjust the frost from the windshield more quickly.
temperature. This lever also adjusts the temperature
to the rear seat outlets. Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
select one of the following modes:
When the temperature outside is 0°F (−18°C) or lower,
use the engine coolant heater, if the vehicle has - (Defog): This mode directs the air to the
one, to provide warmer air, faster to your vehicle. floor outlets, windshield and side window outlets.
The recirculation button cannot be selected while in
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the defog mode.
air-conditioning system on or off. When the button is
pressed, an indicator light will come on and the system 1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
will begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of the windshield and the side window outlets, with only a little
vehicle. You may notice a slight change in engine air directed to the floor outlets. The air conditioning
performance when the air conditioning compressor compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal. window fogging. The recirculation button cannot be
selected while in defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle
until all the windows are clear.

3-22
Rear Window Defogger Dual Automatic Climate Control
If your vehicle has the rear window defogger a warming System
grid is used to remove fog on the rear window.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window

defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is active. The rear window defogger will
automatically turn off approximately ten minutes
after the button is pressed.
If your vehicle has heated mirrors, this button will
activate them.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be With this system you can control the heating, cooling
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary and ventilation for your vehicle. When your vehicle
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to is first started and the climate control system is on,
the defogger grid. or if the climate control system has been turned on,
the display will show the driver’s temperature setting for
five seconds. Then it will show the outside temperature.

3-23
9 (Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and knob clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or
will be directed to the floor. Press the AUTO button, the lower the temperature on the passenger’s side of the
mode button, the fan arrows, or either temperature knob vehicle. The display will show the temperature setting
to turn the system on. decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing toward
the passenger. The passenger’s temperature setting
C (Mode): Press this button to manually select the air can be set to match and link to the driver’s temperature
delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel, or windshield setting by pressing and holding the AUTO button for
outlets. The system will stay in the selected mode until three seconds. When adjusting the driver’s side
the mode button is pressed again or the AUTO button is temperature setting, the passenger’s side temperature
pressed. setting will follow and both arrows will appear on the
display. The passenger’s side temperature setting also
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob resets and relinks to the driver’s side temperature setting
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the if the vehicle has been off for more than three hours.
temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle. The
display will show the temperature setting decreasing Outside Air Temperature Display
or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the driver. A new outside temperature reading will be displayed
This knob can also adjust the passenger’s side if the vehicle has been off for more than three hours.
temperature setting if the two are linked. If the vehicle has been off for less than three hours,
the old temperature reading may be displayed because
underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature.
Underhood heat can also affect the outside temperature
while the engine is running. It may also take
several minutes of driving before the display
updates to the actual outside temperature.

3-24
Automatic Operation Manual Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is To change the current setting, select one of the
active, the system will control the inside temperature, following:
the air delivery mode, and the fan speed.
w9x (Fan): This button allows you to manually
Use the steps below to place the entire system in adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan
automatic mode: speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed. The
1. Press the AUTO button. display will change to show you the selected fan speed
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning and the driver’s side temperature setting for five seconds.
operation and air outlet mode will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will
C (Mode): Press this button to manually change the
run continuously when the outside temperature direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing the
is over approximately 40°F (4°C). The air inlet will button until the desired mode appears on the display.
normally be set to outside air. If it’s hot outside, The display will change to show you the selected
the air inlet will automatically switch to recirculate air delivery mode and the driver’s temperature setting
inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle. for five seconds.

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature. H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C) panel outlets.
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for
the system to adjust. Turn the driver’s or passenger’s ) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half
side temperature knob to adjust the temperature of the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs the
setting as necessary. If you choose the temperature remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is directed
setting of 60°F (15°C), the system will remain at toward the windshield and the side window outlets.
the maximum cooling setting. If you choose the Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer
temperature setting of 90°F (32°C), the system will air to the floor outlets.
remain at the maximum heat setting. Choosing either
maximum setting may not cause the vehicle to heat
or cool any faster.

3-25
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the #A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
floor outlets. Some air also comes out of the defroster manually turn the air conditioning system on or off.
and side window outlets. The recirculation button When the system is on, the system will automatically
cannot be selected in floor mode. begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
vehicle. The air conditioning symbol will appear on the
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn display when the air conditioning is on and will turn
recirculation mode on or off. When this button is pressed, off when the air conditioning is off.
an indicator light in the button will also come on to let you
know that it is activated. Recirculation mode is used to If you turn the air conditioning off while in front defrost
recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. Use this mode to or defog mode, the air conditioning symbol will turn
help prevent outside odors and/or dust from entering your off, however, the A/C compressor will remain on to help
vehicle or to help cool the air inside of your vehicle more de-humidify the air inside the vehicle. If one of the
quickly. Recirculation mode can be used with vent and other modes is selected the compressor will then turn
bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor, defog or the A/C off until it is selected again or the AUTO button
defrost modes. Defog and defrost modes are described is pressed.
later in this section. To avoid fogging the inside glass on rainy and humid
If recirculation mode is selected with floor, defog, or days at a temperature above freezing, press the air
defrost modes, the indicator will flash three times and conditioning button to run the A/C compressor. Also it is
then turn off indicating the selection is not available. best to avoid the use of the recirculation mode except
when maximum air conditioning performance is needed
You may also notice that the air conditioning compressor or for short times to avoid exterior odors.
will run while in recirculation mode. This is normal and will
help to prevent fogging. You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and turns
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may cause on again. This is normal.
the windows to fog while using recirculation mode. If the
windows do start to fog, select defog or defrost mode and
increase fan speed.
Recirculation mode, if selected, will be cleared when the
engine is turned off.
3-26
Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of moisture If your vehicle has the rear window defogger a warming
condensing on the cool window glass. This can be grid is used to remove fog from the rear window.
reduced if the climate control system is used properly.
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear < (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
fog or frost from your windshield. defogger on or off.
An indicator light in the button will come on to let you
- (Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of
know that the rear window defogger is activated.
fog or moisture. This setting will deliver air to the
floor and windshield outlets. The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If you need
0 (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button to additional warming time, press the button again.
clear the windshield and side windows of frost or fog If your vehicle has heated mirrors, they will come on
quickly. The system will automatically control the fan when this button is pressed.
speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode. If the
outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
conditioning compressor will automatically run to help clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything
dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do not drive to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These
the vehicle until all the windows are clear. actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.

3-27
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the
side of the instrument panel to direct the airflow. Use
the thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close
off the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets
at the base of the windshield that could block the
flow of air into the vehicle.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively. The temperature of the air coming through the rear
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can outlets is determined by the front passenger temperature
adversely affect the performance of the system. setting. Use the mode knob to change the direction of
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding airflow (upper, bi-level or floor) to the rear seat area.
equipment to the outside of your vehicle. PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the rear climate
controls on or off.
Rear Climate Control System H (Panel): This position distributes air from the rear
Your vehicle has one of the following rear climate console outlets.
control systems. With either of these systems, the
rear climate controls will be disabled when the front ) (Bi-level): This position distributes air from the
climate control system is in defrost. This occurs to second seat side floor outlets and the rear console
provide maximum airflow to clear the windshield. outlets.
6 (Floor): This position distributes air from the
second seat side floor outlets.

3-28
 P (On/Off): Press this button to turn the rear climate
controls on or off.
z9 y (Fan): Press this button to adjust the fan
speed.
z\ y (Mode): Press this button to change the
direction of airflow (panel, bi-level or floor) to the rear
seat area.
The rear control only turns on if the front climate control
system is on and not in defrost mode.

If your vehicle has the rear seat audio system, the

lower buttons are used to adjust the rear seat climate
control system. The temperature of the air coming
through the rear outlets is determined by the front
passenger temperature setting.

3-29
Warning Lights, Gages, and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
Indicators warning lights work together to let you know when there’s
a problem with your vehicle.
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
locate them. on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
Warning lights and gages can signal that something that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause manual’s advice.
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to your warning lights and gages could also save you Waiting to do repairs can be costly—and even
or others from injury. dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information
will see in the details on the next few pages, some Center (DIC) that works along with the warning lights
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine and gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar on page 3-49.
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.

3-30
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive
safely and economically.

United States Uplevel version shown, Canada and Base similar

3-31
Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles The tachometer displays
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). the engine speed in
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been revolutions per
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) minute (rpm).
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Press the trip stem located on
the instrument panel cluster.
If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed, the new
one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old
odometer.
Safety Belt Reminders
Trip Odometer Safety Belt Reminder Light
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero. several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
The odometer works together with the Driver Information belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A and Trip B odometer.
The safety belt light will
See “Trip Information” under DIC Operation and Displays
also come on and stay on
on page 3-50.
for several seconds, then it
The odometer mileage can be checked without the will flash for several more.
vehicle running. Press the trip stem on the instrument
panel cluster.

3-32
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains Airbag Readiness Light
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel
come on. cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime will pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and
sound for several seconds to remind the front passenger the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
to buckle their safety belt. This would only occur if the information on the airbag system, see Airbag System
passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing on page 1-53.
System on page 1-61 for more information. The
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument This light will come on
panel, will come on and stay on for several seconds and when you start your
then flash for several more. vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds. The
This chime and light are light should go out and
repeated if the passenger the system is ready.
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the

chime nor the light will come on.

3-33
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
serviced right away. Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status
indicator.

{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid United States
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a few

seconds when you start the engine. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there
is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come Canada
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-53 for
more information. When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check.

3-34
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s {CAUTION:
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger Even though the passenger sensing system is
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate). frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
{CAUTION: under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the for more on this, including important safety information.
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.

3-35
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights Charging System Light
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
This light will come on
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
briefly when you turn on the
ignition key, but the engine
is not running, as a check
{CAUTION: to show you it is working.

If the airbag readiness light in the instrument

panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an with the charging system. A charging system Driver
adult-size person sitting in the right front Information Center (DIC) message may also appear.
passenger’s seat may not have the protection See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-53 for
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light more information. This light could indicate that there
on page 3-33 for more on this, including are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is
an electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If you
important safety information.
must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain
to turn off all the accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.

3-36
Voltmeter Gage Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an
When your engine is not
extended period. This condition is normal since the
running, but the ignition is
charging system is not able to provide full power
on, this gage displays the
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
battery voltage in DC volts.
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage may
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings between the low
and high warning zones indicate the normal operating
range. The voltmeter gage may also read lower when
in fuel economy mode. This is normal.

3-37
Brake System Warning Light This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
will come on when you set your parking brake. The light If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
will stay on if your parking brake does not release fully. road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the
means your vehicle has a brake problem. A chime may floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
also sound when the light comes on. have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into Your Vehicle on page 4-40.
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well. {CAUTION:
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

United States Canada

3-38
Antilock Brake System StabiliTrak® Service Light
Warning Light This light will come on
briefly when the engine
For vehicles with is started.
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.

This light will come on if a problem is detected in the

StabiliTrak® system.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. For more information see StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-6.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, your vehicle still has brakes, but
not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, your vehicle does not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-53 for
all brake related DIC messages.

3-39
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This warning light should
come on briefly when the
engine is started.

During most driving conditions, this light will not come

on. If the StabiliTrak® System is actively controlling
the stability and/or traction of the vehicle, this light United States Canada
will flash. This is normal.
This light will come on if any portion of the system This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
has been manually turned off or a problem is detected If the gage pointer moves into the red area, it means that
in the system. the engine coolant has overheated. If you have been
operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions,
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center, a you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off
message will appear also, see DIC Warnings and the engine as soon as possible.
Messages on page 3-53 and StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-6 for more information. See Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more
information.

3-40
Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and Then is
Solid
Your vehicle has a tire This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
pressure light. Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on solid for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. This sequence will repeat with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-67 for more
information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This light comes on briefly when the engine is started
and provides information about tire pressures and Check Engine Light
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
When the Light is Solid Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
This indicates that one or more of your tires are It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels
significantly underinflated. for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information environment.
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-53 for more The check engine light
information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it comes on to indicate that
is safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper there is an OBD II problem
pressure. See Tires on page 5-57 for more information. and service is required.

3-41
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing This light also comes on during a malfunction in
any malfunction. one of two ways:
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with • Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
this light on, after a while, the emission controls detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy and could damage the emission control system
might not be as good, and the engine might not on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs be required.
that might not be covered by your warranty. • Light On Steady — An emission control system
Notice: Modifications made to the engine, malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of Diagnosis and service might be required.
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.

3-42
If the Light is Flashing improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
The following can prevent more serious damage to your with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
vehicle:
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
• Reduce vehicle speed.
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
• Avoid hard accelerations. The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
• Avoid steep uphill grades. system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
Gasoline Octane on page 5-6. Poor fuel quality causes
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer turn on.
for service as soon as possible.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
If the Light Is On Steady change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
You might be able to correct the emission system
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
malfunction by considering the following:
off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic problems that might have developed.
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or

3-43
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Oil Pressure Gage
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD United States Canada
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine driving.
If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

3-44
 Change Engine Oil Light
{CAUTION: Your vehicle may have a
change engine oil light.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.

When this light comes on it means that an oil change

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
and other maintenance procedures are required for your
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
vehicle.
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine
Oil on page 5-16 for more information.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the Once the engine oil has been changed, the change
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range. engine oil light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light
will stay on when the engine is on.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
low oil pressure.

3-45
Security Light Reduced Engine Power Light
For information regarding This light comes on when
this light and the vehicle’s a noticeable reduction in
security system, see the vehicle’s performance
Content Theft-Deterrent occurs.
on page 2-16.

The vehicle can be driven at a reduced speed when

Cruise Control Light the reduced engine power light is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
If your vehicle has a Driver be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
Information Center (DIC), If this light stays on, see your dealer as soon as possible
this light will come on when for diagnosis and repair.
the cruise control is set. This light may also come on if there is a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If this
happens, take the vehicle in for service as soon
as possible.

See Cruise Control on page 3-11 and DIC Warnings

and Messages on page 3-53 for more information.

3-46
Highbeam On Light The service four-wheel drive light comes on to indicate
that there may be a problem with the drive system
and service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated
This light comes on when
by the system before any problem is apparent,
the high-beam headlamps
which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle.
are in use.
This system is also designed to assist your dealer
in correctly diagnosing a malfunction.

Check Gages Warning Light

The check gages light will
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8 come on briefly when you
for more information. are starting the engine.

Service Four-Wheel Drive Warning

Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on If the light comes on and stays on while you are
the ignition, as a check to driving, check your coolant temperature and engine
show you it is working. oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning
zones.

3-47
Gate Ajar Light When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
If this light comes on, the Here are four things that some owners ask about.
liftgate or liftglass is not None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
completely shut. • At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with the liftgate fill the tank.
or liftglass even partially open.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
Fuel Gage speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.

United States Canada

3-48
Low Fuel Warning Light Driver Information Center (DIC)
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when Your vehicle may have this feature. The Driver
you are starting the engine. Information Center (DIC) display is located on the
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on If your vehicle has DIC buttons, they are located on
page 5-5. the steering wheel. The DIC can display information
such as the trip odometer, fuel economy, customization
features, and warning/status messages.
Check Gas Cap Light If your vehicle does not have DIC steering wheel
buttons, you will not have all of the features listed.
If your vehicle has this Scroll through the odometer and trip odometer by
light, it will come on if your pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the
gas cap is not securely instrument panel cluster. Turn off, or acknowledge, DIC
fastened. messages by pressing the trip odometer reset stem.
See Speedometer and Odometer on page 3-32 for
information on features for vehicles without DIC buttons.

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-41 for more

information.

3-49
 DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing the trip stem will acknowledge
any warning or service messages. Pressing any of
the DIC steering wheel buttons — trip information, fuel
information, customization, or select button — will
also acknowledge any warnings or service messages.
You should take any message that appears on the
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display display seriously and remember that clearing the
the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressure, and timer. message will only make the message disappear,
not correct the problem.
t (Fuel Information): Press this button to display The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
the current range, fuel used, average fuel economy,
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering
and engine oil life.
wheel. These buttons are trip information, fuel
4 (Customization): Press this button to access the information, customization, and select. The button
functions are detailed in the following pages.
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle.

r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC

functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge DIC
messages and clear them from the DIC display.

3-50
Trip Information Button Tire Pressures: Press the trip information button
until TIRE PRESSURES appears on the display.
3 (Trip Information): Press the trip information This mode shows the tire pressure in pounds per
button to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A, square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the select
TRIP B, TIRE PRESSURES, and TIMER. button to scroll through the following information:
Odometer: Press the trip information button until • LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows driver’s side tire.
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either • RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset stem located on
passenger’s side tire.
the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will also display
the odometer. • LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A driver’s side tire.
appears on the display. This mode shows the current • RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either passenger’s side tire.
miles or kilometers.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
appears on the display. This mode shows the current The display will show the amount of time that has
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
miles or kilometers.
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
the select button for one second while in one of the trip shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A or 59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
TRIP B. the display will roll back to zero.
You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they
are displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster. To stop the counting of time, press the select button
If you press and hold the reset stem or the select button briefly while TIMER is displayed.
for more than four seconds, the display will show the
distance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
or TRIP B. button while TIMER is displayed.

3-51
Fuel Information Button Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG. ECON appears on the display. This
t (Fuel Information): Press the fuel information mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG), liters per
button to scroll through the range, fuel used, average 100 kilometers (L/100 km), or kilometers per liter (km/L)
fuel economy, and the engine oil life system. your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving
conditions.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
Press and hold the select button for one second while
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
remaining distance you can drive without refueling.
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy is not
in the fuel tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel
reset, it will be continually updated each time you drive.
level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
conditions change, this data is gradually updated. Fuel The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
range cannot be reset. oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows driving conditions.
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine
information, press and hold the select button for
Oil Life System on page 5-19.
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-16 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.

3-52
Customization Button Some messages may not require immediate action.
Press any of the DIC buttons on the steering wheel or
4 (Customization): Press the customization button to the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel
access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages
the settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle and to clear them from the display.
Customization on page 3-58 for more information. Some messages cannot be cleared from the display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
Select Button action before they can be removed from the DIC display.
Take any messages that appear on the display seriously
r (Select): Press the select button to reset certain and remember that clearing the messages will only make
DIC functions, turn off or acknowledge messages on the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
the DIC display, and set your customization settings.
The following are the possible messages that can be
For example, this button will allow you to reset the trip
displayed and some information about them.
odometers, turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message,
and enables you to scroll through and select the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
language in which the DIC information will appear.
This message displays when the engine oil needs to
be changed and service is required for your vehicle.
DIC Warnings and Messages See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver Oil on page 5-16 for more information. Also see Engine
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that Oil Life System on page 5-19 for information on how
some action may be needed to correct the condition. to reset the message. This message clears itself
Multiple messages may appear one after another. after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.

3-53
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DRIVER DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the pressure in one or This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon check the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 5-57, Loading Your Vehicle on ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINE
page 4-34, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64. OVERHEATED
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-50. If the tire Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-41. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
CHECK WASHER FLUID possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
This message displays if the washer fluid level is low.
on page 5-28 for more information.
Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid
reservoir clears this message. See Windshield Washer This message displays and a chime sounds if the
Fluid on page 5-37. This message clears itself after cooling system temperature gets hot. See Engine
10 seconds, or you can manually clear it from the Overheating on page 5-28 for the proper course of
DIC display. action. This message clears when the coolant
temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
CURB VIEW ACTIVATED
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when the passenger outside
rearview mirror moves into the curb view position. This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
See Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 2-47 level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Low
for more information. Fuel Warning Light on page 3-49, Filling the Tank on
page 5-8, and Fuel on page 5-5 for more information.

3-54
ICE POSSIBLE OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
This message may display if the outside temperature Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
reaches a level where ice could form on the roadway. oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
Adjust your driving accordingly. If the temperature occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
rises to a safe level, the message clears. This message Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
clears itself after 10 seconds, or you can manually as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
clear it from the DIC display. the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information.
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in the do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5. and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
side rear door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off This message displays and a chime sounds if the
the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close passenger door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off
the door again. Check to see if the message still the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
appears on the DIC. the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.

3-55
REAR ACCESS OPEN and check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed, or appears again when
This message displays and a chime sounds if the you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in See your dealer/retailer.
ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate
and liftglass. See Liftgate/Liftglass on page 2-12. SERVICE CHARGING SYS (System)
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on
the DIC display. This message displays if there is a problem with the
battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR charging system light may also turn on in the instrument
panel cluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-36.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the The battery will not be charging at an optimal rate and
passenger side rear door is not fully closed. Stop and the vehicle will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy
turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, mode. The vehicle is safe to drive, however you should
and close the door again. Check to see if the message have the electrical system checked by your
still appears on the DIC. dealer/retailer.
SERVICE AIR BAG SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there is a problem with If this message displays, it means there may be a
the airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect problem with the StabiliTrak® system. If this message
the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light appears, try to reset the system by performing the
on page 3-33 and Airbag System on page 1-53 for following: stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine
more information. again. If this message still comes on, it means there is a
problem. You should see your dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you do not have the
This message displays if a problem occurs with the benefit of StabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and drive
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as accordingly.
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle

3-56
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure This message displays when you press the StabiliTrak®
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire button for more than five seconds or when stability control
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during has been automatically disabled. The StabiliTrak® button
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on is located on the transmission shift handle. To limit
page 3-41. Several conditions may cause this message wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on enhancement system, you should normally leave
page 5-69 for more information. If the warning comes on StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak® off
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and
See your dealer/retailer. you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you
are driving in extreme off-road conditions and require
STABILITRAK ACTIVE more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-33. To turn the StabiliTrak®
This message displays anytime the StabiliTrak® system
system back on, press the StabiliTrak® button again.
activates to maintain vehicle stability. Any combination
of engine speed management, brake traction control, There are several conditions that can cause this
and stability control displays this message. message to appear.
STABILITRAK NOT READY • The message may display if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
This message may display if driving conditions delay Light on page 3-38.
StabiliTrak® system initialization. This is normal.
Once the system initializes, this message will no
• The message displays if the vehicle is shifted
into 4LO.
longer be displayed on the DIC.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.

3-57
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP TURN SIGNAL ON
This message may display and a chime may sound if This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly. Fully signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
DIC Vehicle Customization
atmosphere. This message remains on until it is Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
manually cleared from the DIC display. The DIC allow you to program some features to one setting
message is also cancelled if the ignition is turned off. based on your preference. All of the customizable
The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon options listed may not be available on your vehicle.
light may come on again during a second trip if the Only the options available display on the Driver
fuel cap is still not tightened properly. See Malfunction Information Center (DIC).
Indicator Lamp on page 3-41 for more information. The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
TRACTION CONTROL OFF been changed from their default state since then.
This message displays when you momentarily press To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
the StabiliTrak® button located on the transmission is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). To avoid excessive
shift handle. In this mode, stability control and the drain on the battery, it is recommended that the
brake-traction control are functional. Engine speed headlamps are turned off.
management will be modified and the driven wheels
can spin more freely. For more details on this mode, Press the customization button to scroll through the
see StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. available customizable options.
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS momentarily displays before going to a
customization option.

3-58
Lock Doors Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS: IN Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS:
GEAR appears in the display. To select your preference IN PARK appears in the display. To select your
for automatic locking, press the select button while LOCK preference for automatic unlocking, press the select
DOORS: IN GEAR is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the button while UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK is displayed
select button will scroll through the following settings: on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following settings:
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P). UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
three seconds. unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
To select a setting and move on to the next feature, UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
press the customization button while the desired setting will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
is displayed on the DIC.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-9
unlocked automatically.
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-9
for more information.

3-59
Lock Feedback Unlock Feedback
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK: Press the customization button until UNLOCK
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference FEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. To select
for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle your preference for the feedback you will receive when
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, press unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry
the select button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH is (RKE) transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button FEEDBACK: LAMPS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
will scroll through the following settings: the select button will scroll through the following settings:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lamps will flash each time you press the button with
lock symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn will the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter.
chirp the second time you press the lock button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback the second time you press the button with the unlock
when locking the vehicle. symbol on the RKE transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the RKE transmitter. symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn will
chirp the second time you press the unlock button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
on the RKE transmitter. when unlocking the vehicle.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature, To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC. is displayed on the DIC.

3-60
Headlamp Delay Perimeter Lights
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP DELAY: Press the customization button until PERIMETER
10 SEC appears in the display. To select your preference LIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To select your
for how long the headlamps will stay on after you turn off preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
the vehicle, press the select button while HEADLAMP while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON is displayed on the
DELAY: 10 SEC is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
select button will scroll through the following settings: the following settings:
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds) (default): PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
The headlamps will stay on for 10 seconds. and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC: The headlamps will stay with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
on for 20 seconds.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC: The headlamps will stay not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE
on for 40 seconds. transmitter.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute): The headlamps To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
will stay on for 1 minute. press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN: The headlamps will stay
on for 2 minutes.
HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN: The headlamps will stay
on for 3 minutes.
HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF: The headlamps will not
turn on.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.

3-61
Easy Exit Seat Seat Recall
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT: Press the customization button until SEAT RECALL:
OFF appears in the display. To select your preference OFF appears in the display. To select your preference
for seat position exit, press the select button while EASY for recall of the driver’s memory seat and adjustable
EXIT SEAT: OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing pedals, if your vehicle has this feature, press the select
the select button will scroll through the following settings: button while SEAT RECALL: OFF is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall the following settings:
will occur.
SEAT RECALL: OFF (default): The driver’s memory
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will
the exit position when the key is removed from the only be recalled when the memory button 1 or 2
ignition. is pressed.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting SEAT RECALL: AT KEY IN: The driver’s memory
is displayed on the DIC. seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will
be recalled when you put the key in the ignition.
See “Easy Exit Seat” under Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals on page 1-5 for more information. SEAT RECALL: ON REMOTE: The driver’s memory
seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will
be recalled when you unlock the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-5 for
more information.

3-62
Curb View Alarm Warning
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW: OFF Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING:
appears in the display. To select your preference for BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW: for alarm warning, press the select button while ALARM
OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button WARNING: BOTH is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
will scroll through the following settings: select button will scroll through the following settings:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’s outside ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
mirror will not be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is active.
into REVERSE (R).
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside the alarm is active.
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R). ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in any
forward gear, the mirror will return to the normal driving ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
position, following a short delay. warning on activation.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature, To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting press the customization button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC. is displayed on the DIC.
See Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 2-47 for See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16 for more
more information. information.

3-63
Language Units
Press the customization button until LANGUAGE: Press the customization button until UNITS: U.S.
ENGLISH appears in the display. To select your (ENGLISH) appears in the display. To select the units
preference for display language, press the select button of measurement in which the DIC will display vehicle
while LANGUAGE: ENGLISH is displayed on the DIC. information, press the select button while UNITS: U.S.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the following (ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
settings: button will scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default): All information will
English. be displayed in English units.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French. UNITS: METRIC (km/L): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km): All information will be
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the customization button while the desired setting displayed in metric units.
is displayed on the DIC. To select a setting and exit out of the customizable
options, press the customization button while the desired
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
setting is displayed on the DIC.
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same time.
The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages in their
particular language. English will be in English, Francais
will be in French, and Espanol will be in Spanish. When
you see the language that you would like, release both
buttons. The DIC will then display the information in the
language you chose.
You can also scroll through the different languages
by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for
four seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.

3-64
Audio System(s) • Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features. conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION: Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
This system provides you with far greater CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
access to audio stations and song listings. sure that it can be added by checking with your
Giving extended attention to entertainment dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
your eyes on the road and your mind on the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
while driving. systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
safe driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid operate through the radio/entertainment system.
distraction while driving. If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
While your vehicle is parked:
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls. equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
• Familiarize yourself with its operation. installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.

3-65
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained Radio(s)
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system
can be played even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22
for more information.

Setting the Clock

The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to
represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
displays. AM or PM displays for morning or evening
hours. Press and hold the minute button until the correct
minute displays. The time can be set with the ignition
on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
UPDATED and the clock symbol appear on the display.
If the time is not available from the station, NO UPDATE
or NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to
an RDS broadcast station, it could take a few minutes
for the time to update.

3-66
Base MP3 Radio shown, Bose® similar Base Six-Disc CD Radio shown, Bose® similar

Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio

system.
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle has six Bose® amplified speakers.

3-67
Radio Data System (RDS) Playing the Radio
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). PWR (Power): Push to turn the system on and off.
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. op VOL or VOLUME: Turn clockwise or
With RDS, the radio can do the following: counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the volume.
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of DISPL (Display) or INFO (Information): While the
programming. ignition is off, press the DISPL or INFO knob to display
• Receive announcements concerning local and the time.
national emergencies. For RDS, press the DISPL or INFO knob to change
• Display messages from radio stations. what displays while using RDS. The display options are
station name, RDS station frequency, PTY (program
This system relies upon receiving specific information type), and the name of the program (if available).
from these stations and only works when the information
is available. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL or INFO knob
incorrect information that causes the radio features while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio of information related to the current song or channel:
station. Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters display instead of the frequency. To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
RDS stations can also provide the time of day, a or INFO knob until you see the desired display, then
program type (PTY) for current programming, and briefly press and hold the knob until a beep is heard.
the name of the program being broadcast. The selected display becomes the default.

3-68
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic © SCAN ¨: Press and hold either SCAN arrow, or
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make depending on the radio, SCAN or TYPE arrow briefly
up for road and wind noise while driving by increasing until SCAN or SCN displays and a beep is heard.
the volume as vehicle speed increases. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to then goes to the next station. Press either arrow again
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL, or depending on to stop scanning.
your radio, MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL. Each higher To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
setting provides more volume compensation at faster arrow, or depending on the radio, SCAN or TYPE arrow
vehicle speeds. On some radios, NONE may display if for more than four seconds. PSCN or PSC displays and a
the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn double beep is heard. The radio goes to a preset station,
automatic volume off, press this button until OFF, AVOL plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next preset
OFF, or AUTO VOL OFF displays. station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning
presets.
Finding a Station
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that are
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or in the selected band.
XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display shows the
selection.

o TUNE p: Turn to select radio stations.

op / © ¨ SEEK: Press either SEEK arrow, or

depending on the radio, SEEK or TYPE arrow to go
to the previous or to the next station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.

3-69
Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the AUDIO: Push and release until BASS, MID (midrange)
following steps: (without Bose®), or TREB (treble) displays. Turn to
increase or to decrease the tone. The display shows the
1. Turn the radio on. bass, midrange (without Bose®), or treble level. If a
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 station is weak or has static, decrease the treble.
or XM2. To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or treble
3. Tune in the desired station. to the middle position while it is displayed, push and
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered hold this knob. The radio produces one beep and
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that adjusts the display level to the middle position.
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
that was set, returns. position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton. tone or speaker controls displays. ALL CENTERED
displays and a beep is heard.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following: AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to select
1. Tune to the preset station. customized equalization settings designed for country/
western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting. To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
Once the equalization no longer displays, the and release this button until CUSTOM displays.
equalization is set for that preset station. The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio has the Bose® audio system, the equalization
settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.

3-70
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and
(RDS and XM™)
the left speakers, push and release until BAL (balance) For all Radios except the MP3 Radio, select and find a
displays. Turn to move the sound toward the right or the desired PTY perform the following:
left speakers.
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers, select mode. TYPE or P-TYPE and the last
push and release this knob until FADE or FAD displays. selected PTY displays.
Turn to move the sound toward the front or the rear 2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
speakers. TYPE button to select a PTY.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position 3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select and to
while it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob. go to the PTY’s first station.
On some radios, push the AUDIO knob, then push it
again and hold it until one beep is heard. 4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button, then press either SEEK or TYPE
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle arrow once.
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or 5. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow twice to exit the
speaker controls display. ALL CENTERED displays and a program type select mode.
beep is heard.
For the Base Radio, if the radio cannot find the desired
program type, NONE displays and the radio returns
to the last station you were listening to.

3-71
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
the following:
(RDS and XM™)
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE or P-TYPE and the last For the MP3 Radio, select and find a desired PTY by
selected PTY displays. performing the following steps:
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the 1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
TYPE button to select a PTY. 2. Press the SEEK TYPE button to select and go to
3. Once the desired PTY displays, press and hold the PTY’s first station.
either SCAN or TYPE arrow for two seconds, and the 3. Press the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the
radio begins scanning the stations in the PTY. PTY and then go to another station.
4. Press either SCAN or TYPE arrow to stop scanning. 4. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
lets the radio switch to a stronger station with the same IF PTY times out and no longer displays, go back to
program type. To turn alternate frequency on, press Step 1.
and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON displays. The If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio searches
radio can switch to stations with a stronger frequency. for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold announcements.
BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays. If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
The radio does not switch to other stations. displays and the radio returns to the last station.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.

3-72
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all
For the Base Radio, pushbuttons have factory PTY RDS stations.
presets. Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, TRAF (Traffic) (MP3 Radio): If TRAF displays, the
by performing the following steps: tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and you
will hear a traffic announcement when the tuned radio
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2. station broadcasts one.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
displays. press the TRAF button and the radio seeks to a station
that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the announcements is found, the radio stops seeking and
TYPE button to select a PTY. TRAF displays. If no station is found that broadcasts
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered traffic announcements, No Traf displays.
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that If TRAF displays, press the TRAF button to turn off the
numbered pushbutton is pressed (while in PTY traffic announcements.
mode), the PTY that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. The radio plays the traffic announcement if the volume is
low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the last tuned
RDS Messages station broadcasts traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
ALERT! (MP3 Radio): Alert warns of local or national
Service.
emergencies. When an alert announcement comes
on the current radio station, ALERT! displays. You will INFO (Information): If the current station has a
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low message, the information symbol or INFO displays. Press
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play stops during this button to see the message. The message can display
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
turned off.

3-73
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the XM™ Satellite Radio Service
message appears every three seconds. To scroll through
the message, press and release the INFO button. A new XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
group of words displays after every press of this button. 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
Once the complete message has displayed, the XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
information symbol or INFO disappears from the display and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
until another new message is received. The last message digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
is displayed by pressing the INFO button. View the last subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
message until a new message is received or you tune to Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
a different station. fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or
Radio Messages call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca
or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. Radio Messages for XM™ Only
If CAL ERR displays, it means that the radio has See XM Radio Messages on page 3-86 later in this
not been configured properly for the vehicle and section for further detail.
must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
LOCKED: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

3-74
Playing a CD If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
For the Base Radio, if you want to insert a CD with the to the edge.
ignition off, first press the eject button or the INFO knob.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
if it was the last selected audio source. and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays. The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
mechanism.
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
Care of Your CDs one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the CD player could be damaged. While using the
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s) any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
in their original cases or other protective cases and away CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the materials, liquids, and debris.
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
section.
CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

3-75
For vehicles that have a radio with a Six-Disc CD To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
player, see the following: Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
LOAD: Press to load CDs into the CD player. This CD The radio begins to play the last CD loaded.
player holds up to six CDs.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
To insert one CD, do the following: each CD displays.
1. Turn the ignition on.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
For every CD loaded, a number displays. To play a
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
specific CD, first press the CD AUX button (if not already
slot, to turn green.
in CD mode), then press the numbered pushbutton
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot, that corresponds to the CD. A small bar displays under
label side up. The player pulls the CD in. the CD number that is playing and the track number
To insert multiple CDs, do the following: displays.
1. Turn the ignition on. Z (Eject) (Base or MP3 Radio): Press to eject a
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds. CD. Eject can be activated with either the ignition
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located to or radio off. CDs can be loaded with the radio and
the right of the slot, begins to flash and MULTI ignition off if this button is pressed first.
LOAD # displays.
CD Z (Eject): Press to eject CD(s).
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert the CD part To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
way into the slot, label side up. The player pulls the release this button.
CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light begins
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The CD player
takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.

3-76
To eject multiple CDs, do the following: 2 FLD w (Next) (MP3 Radio): This pushbutton does
1. Press and hold the Z button for two seconds. not work while using a non-MP3 CD.
A beep is heard and the indicator light, located to 1 PREV (Previous) (Base Radio): Press to go to the
the right of the slot, begins to flash and EJECT ALL beginning of the current track (if more than eight seconds
displays. have played), or to the beginning of the previous track
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD # (if less than eight seconds have played). TRACK and
displays. The CD ejects and can be removed. the track number displays. If this pushbutton is held or
pressed more than once, the player continues moving
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light begins backward through the CD.
flashing again and another CD ejects.
2 NEXT (Base Radio): Press to go to the next track.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the Z button. TRACK and the track number displays. If this
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD pushbutton is held or pressed more than once, the
automatically pulls back into the player. If CD is pushed player continues moving forward through the CD.
back into the player, before the 25-second time period is
complete, the player senses an error and tries to eject the { REV or 3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold to
CD several times before stopping. reverse quickly within a track.
Do not repeatedly press the Z button to eject a CD For the Base Radio, press and hold for less than
after pushing it in manually. The player’s 25-second two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing
eject timer resets at each press of eject, causing speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds
the player to not eject the CD until the 25-second to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed.
time period has elapsed. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to play the passage. ET and/or the elapsed time
1 FLD x (Previous) (MP3 Radio): This pushbutton
of the track displays.
does not work while using a non-MP3 CD.

3-77
FWD | or 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold to RDM (Random): With the random setting, tracks
advance quickly within a track. can be listened to in random, rather than sequential,
order, on one CD or on all of the CDs. To use random,
For the Base Radio, press and hold for less than do one of the following:
two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing • To play the tracks on the CD in random order,
speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds press and release the RDM button. RANDOM ONE
to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed. displays. Press again to turn off random play.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this • To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
button to play the passage. ET and/or the elapsed time in random order, press and hold RDM for more
of the track displays. than two seconds. A beep sounds and RANDOM
ALL displays. Press again to turn off random play.
5 B (CD): Press to play a CD while listening to the AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded. select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one track or an The equalization is stored when a CD is played.
entire CD can be repeated. For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
To use repeat, do the following:
©¨ / o p SEEK: Press the left arrow to go to the
• To repeat a track, press and release the RPT button. start of the current or to the previous track.
RPT displays. Press again to turn off repeat play.
On some radios, pressing the left arrow, if more
• To repeat the CD, press and hold the RPT button for than 10 seconds have played, goes to the start of the
two seconds. RPT displays. Press again to turn off current track.
repeat play. Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track.
6 RDM (Random) (Base Radio or MP3 Radio): Press If either arrow is pressed more than once, the player
to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, continues moving backward or forward through the CD.
order. RDM ON displays. RDM T or RDM and the track On some radios, pressing either arrow for more than
number displays when each track starts to play. Press two seconds scans the previous or next tracks at
again to turn off random play. RDM OFF displays. five to eight seconds per track. SCAN and the track
number displays.
3-78
© SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold either Using Song List Mode
SCAN, or depending on the radio, the TYPE arrow
for more than two seconds until SCAN or TRACK SCAN The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
displays and a beep is heard. The radio goes to the This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
next track, plays for 10 seconds, then goes to the next To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
track. Press either SCAN or depending on the radio, the following steps:
TYPE arrow again, to stop scanning. 1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
arrow for more than four seconds until ALL CD SCAN for more information.
displays and a beep sounds. Use this feature to listen to 2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
10 seconds of the first track of each loaded CD. Press mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display.
either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. If S-LIST displays, press the SONG LIST button
o TUNE p (MP3 Radio): Turning this knob fast to turn it off.
tracks reverse or advances through tracks. The track 3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
number displays for each track. pushbutton and then use the right SEEK or TYPE
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track
DISPL (Display) or INFO (Information): Press to see
begins to play.
how long the current track has been playing. ET and/or
the elapsed time displays. To change the default on the 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
display, track, or elapsed time, press until the desired track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,
display appears, then press and hold briefly until a beep one beep sounds. After two seconds of continuously
sounds. The selected display becomes the default. pressing the SONG LIST button, two beeps
sound to confirm the track has been saved.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD(s) remains inside the radio for 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
future listening. S-LIST FULL displays if more than 20 selections
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while listening are saved.
to the radio, or to listen to an auxiliary source (such
as rear seat entertainment, if equipped).

3-79
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. To delete the entire song list, perform the following
One beep sounds and S-LIST displays. The recorded steps:
tracks begin to play in the order they were saved. 1. Turn the CD player on.
Seek through the song list by using either SEEK or 2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
TYPE arrow. Seeking past the last saved track returns S-LIST displays.
to the first saved track.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following than four seconds. One beep sounds, followed by
steps: two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep
1. Turn the CD player on. sounds after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY displays
indicating the song list has been deleted.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST displays. If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
desired track to be deleted. deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the
song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
one beep sounds. After two seconds of continuously One beep sounds and S-LIST is removed from the
pressing the SONG LIST button, two beeps display.
sound to confirm that the track has been deleted. Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks
are moved up the list. When another track is added to Your vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3/WMA
the song list, the track is added to the end of the list. feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playing
an MP3/WMA CD-R disc. For more information on how
to play an MP3/WMA CD-R disc, see Using an MP3
on page 3-82 later in this section.

3-80
CD Messages Listening to a DVD
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons: system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol displays
indicating that the DVD is available and can be listened to
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns through your vehicle’s speakers.
to normal, the CD should play.
To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX button until
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the RSE displays. The current radio source stops and the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play. DVD sound comes through the speakers.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. To stop listening to the DVD, press the CD AUX button,
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and if a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button to select
try again. a different source.
• There could have been a problem while burning When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
the CD. goes off of the radio display and RSE OFF displays.
The radio returns to the last radio source that you were
• The label could be caught in the CD player. listening to. See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, System on page 3-87 for more information.
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

3-81
Using an MP3 use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length
MP3/WMA Disc of the file, folder, or playlist names. An MP3 CD that
was recorded using no file folders can also be played.
MP3/WMA Format The system can support up to 11 folders in depth, though,
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer: keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order to
keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD
CD-R disc. contains more than the maximum of 253 folders,
• Standard audio, MP3 files, and WMA files can be 50 playlists, 20 sessions, and 949 files, the player
mixed on one CD. lets you access and navigate up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum are played.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions might not work. Root Directory
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album directory has compressed audio files, the directory
is available for display by the radio when recorded displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2. the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder Empty Directory or Folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3 file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
burn the disc all at once. advances to the next folder in the file structure that
The player is able to read and play a maximum of contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
253 folders, 50 playlists, 20 sessions, and 949 files. does not display.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names may

3-82
No Folder When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files mode has been chosen as the default display. See DISPL
are located under the root folder. The next and previous (display) later in this section for more information.
folder functions do not function on a CD that was The new track name displays.
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT. File System and Naming
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed The song name that displays is the song name that is
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT. Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
Order of Play text and the extension of the file name does not display.
Tracks are played in the following order: Preprogrammed Playlists
• If CD audio tracks are available they will be played Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
first, otherwise play begins from the first track in WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
the first playlist and continues sequentially through can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
the last playlist has played, play continues from the folders containing compressed audio song files.
first track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have played,
play continues from files according to their numerical
listing. After playing the last track from the last folder,
play begins again at the first track of the first folder or
root directory.
3-83
Playing an MP3/WMA Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse
at 20 times the normal playing speed. Release this
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The pushbutton to play the passage. REV and the elapsed
player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD should time of the track displays.
begin playing and the CD symbol displays. To insert a
CD while the ignition is off, first press the Z button 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
or the DISPL knob. to advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the 10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio for more than two seconds to advance at 20 times the
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
if it was the last selected audio source. the passage. FWD and the elapsed time of the track
As each new track starts to play, the track number and displays.
song title displays.
6 RDM (Random): Press and release this pushbutton
1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press this button to go to play the tracks of a current folder or playlist, in random
order. FLDR RDM displays. Once all of the tracks a
to the first track in the previous folder. Press this button
current folder or playlist have played the system moves
while in folder random mode to go to the first track in
on to the next folder or playlist and play all of the tracks
the previous folder and random the tracks in that folder.
in random order.
2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this button to go to To play all tracks on the CD in random order, press and
the first track in the next folder. Press this button while hold this pushbutton for two seconds. A beep sounds and
in folder random mode to go to the first track in the DISC RDM displays. This feature does not work with
next folder and random the tracks in that folder. playlists.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton When in random, press and release either SEEK arrow to
to reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold go to the next or previous random track.
this pushbutton for less than two seconds to
reverse at 10 times the normal playing speed. Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RDM displays.

3-84
o SEEK p: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
start of the previous track. Press the right SEEK arrow knob until the desired display appears, then press and
to go to the start of the next track. Press either SEEK hold this knob for two seconds. The radio produces one
arrow for more than two seconds to search the previous beep and the selected display becomes the default.
or next tracks at two tracks per second. Release the INFO (Information): INFO displays when a current
button to stop searching and to play the track. track has ID3 tag information. Press this button
to display the artist name and album contained in
o TUNE p: Turn the knob to fast track reverse or the tag. INFO disappears from the display when the
advance through the tracks in all folders or playlists. information in the ID3 tag has finished.
The track number and file name displays for each track.
Turn this knob while in random to fast track reverse BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
or advance the tracks in sequential order. CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
The display shows only eight characters, but there can when listening to the radio. The CD symbol displays
be up to four pages of text. If there are more than eight when a CD is loaded.
characters in the song, folder, or playlist name, they are
displayed if the knob is not pressed again, pressing this Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject can
knob within two seconds goes to the next display mode. activate while either the ignition or the radio is off. CDs
• Track mode displays the current track number and can be loaded while the ignition and the radio is off if this
the ID3 tag song name. button is pressed first.

• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder or

playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
• Time of day mode displays the time of day and the
ID3 tag song name.

3-85
XM Radio Messages Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
If you have a Radio with CD or Radio with Six-Disc CD,
you can receive these radio display messages. XM Locked: The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, vehicles. If this message is received after having your
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates
updated, and no action is required. This process should with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label
take no longer than 30 seconds. is needed to activate the service.
No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but the Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™ signal. to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal with your dealer/retailer.
should return.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within a
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
processing audio and text data. No action is needed. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
This message should disappear shortly.
If you have a Radio with CD (MP3), you can receive
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service. these radio display messages.
Tune to another channel.
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button. Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required. This process
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.

3-86
No Signl: The system is functioning correctly, but the Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message will
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™ signal. alternate with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label.
When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal This label is needed to activate the service.
should return.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
Loading: The radio system is acquiring and processing channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
audio and text data. No action is needed. This message with your dealer/retailer.
should disappear shortly.
Check XM: If this message does not clear within
Off Air: This channel is not currently in service. Tune a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
to another channel. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CH Unavl: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station Navigation/Radio System
was one of the presets, choose another station for
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
that preset button.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no matter
information is available at this time on this channel. how advanced, can never replace your own judgment.
The system is working properly. See the Navigation System manual for some tips to help
NotFound: There are no channels available for the you reduce distractions while driving.
selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Lock: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
have previously been in another vehicle. For security System
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having your Your vehicle may have the Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system
includes a DVD player, a video display screen, two sets
of wireless headphones, and a remote control.

3-87
Before You Drive Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only and is
not intended for the driver while driving. The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones shut off automatically if
Parental Control they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes to save battery power. The signal can
This button is located behind the video screen. Press be lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze the are out of range of the transmitters.
video and mute the audio. The video screen displays
Parental Control ON and the power indicator light on When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
the DVD player flashes. It also disables all other button passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
operations from the remote control and the DVD player, (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
with the exception of the eject button. Press this button (if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
again to restore operation of the DVD player. instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
through the RSE.
This button can also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
Power (RAP) is active. and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Headphones Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless Both sets of rear seat headphones may include foam
headphones. ear pads.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control. The foam ear pads can become worn or damaged if
An indicator light illuminates on the headphones when they are not handled or stored properly. They can
they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries be replaced separately from the headphone set.
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be
following for more information. ordered in pairs. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.

3-88
Battery Replacement To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA jacks
To change the batteries on the headphones: and turn both the auxiliary device and the RSE system
1. Loosen the screw to the battery door on the left power on. If the RSE system had been previously in the
side of the headphones and slide open. DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE button on the
faceplate or the remote control switches the RSE system
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
between the auxiliary device and the DVD player.
Install correctly using the diagram on the inside
of the battery compartment. How to Change the Video Format when in
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door the Auxiliary Mode
screw.
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of In some countries, the video format may be in the
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, PAL system. To change the video format, perform
dry place. the following:
Stereo RCA Jacks 1. Press the z display menu button.
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen. 2. Press the down q navigation arrow to highlight the
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to be Video Format option.
connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder
or a video game unit to the RSE system. Standard RCA 3. Press the r button to select Video Format.
cables, not included, are needed to connect the auxiliary 4. Press the left p or right o navigation arrows to
device to the RCA jacks. The yellow connector inputs
select the desired video format.
video and the red and white connectors input right and
left audio. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for 5. Press the r button to accept the change.
proper connection of the auxiliary device.

3-89
Audio Output Video Screen
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be The video screen is located in the overhead console.
heard through the following possible sources:
To use the video screen, do the following:
• Wireless Headphones 1. Push forward on the release button located on the
• Vehicle Speakers DVD display console.
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat 2. Pull the screen down, away from you, and adjust its
Audio system (if equipped) position as desired.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available. locked position.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
information. position, the screen shuts off, but the DVD continues
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the to play through the previous audio or video source.
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system can The video screen contains the IR transmitters for the
be selected as an audio source on the radio if the RSE wireless headphones and the IR receivers for the remote
system power is on. Once the RSE system is selected as control. If the screen is in the closed position, the signals
an audio source on the radio, adjust the speaker volume are not available for the operation of the headphones or
on the radio, if necessary. If the RSE system power is not the remote control.
on, the RSE system is not an available source on the
radio. See your vehicle’s radio information. Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the Screen” later in this section for more information.
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system can be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if the
RSE system power is on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
on page 3-100 for more information.

3-90
DVD Player DVD Player Buttons (Without Sunroof)
The DVD player is located in the overhead console and
is controlled by the buttons on the DVD player or on
the remote control. See “Remote Control” later in
this section for more information.
The DVD player power can be turned on while the
ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code in the country that
the vehicle was sold. The DVD region code is printed
on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if O (Power): Press to turn the RSE system on and off.
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media The power indicator light illuminates when the power
may or may not be supported by the DVD player. The is on.
DVD player does not support DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, and
DVD Audio media. An error message displays if this type X (Eject): Press to eject a DVD or CD.
of media is inserted into the DVD player. SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the DVD
When using the wired headphones, not included, if player and an auxiliary source.
the front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
Service (if equipped), the audio for these sources will be forwarding a DVD or CD. Press twice to return to
heard, instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing the beginning of the DVD.
through the RSE.
If an error message displays on the video screen, s (Play/Pause): Press to start play of a DVD or CD.
see “DVD Messages” later in this section. Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press
again to continue the play of the DVD or CD.
3-91
y (Main DVD Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. DVD Player Buttons (With Sunroof)
The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD
menu. After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when playing a DVD.

z (Set-up Menu): Press to adjust the color, tint,

brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic range
compression. The dynamic range compression feature
can be used to reduce loud audio and increase low audio
produced by some DVDs.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start play of a DVD or CD.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting, Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press
press this button to display the feature, then press and again to continue the play of the DVD or CD.
hold until the default setting displays.
c / X (Stop/Eject): Press to stop playing,
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this
this button to display and to remove the track and time
button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
information.
Press and hold this button for more than three seconds
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the to eject a DVD or CD.
arrows to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are

highlighted in any menu.

3-92
Playing a Disc Ejecting a Disc (DVD Player without
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side Sunroof)
up into the loading slot. The DVD player continues Press the c / X button on the DVD player faceplate
loading the disc and the player automatically starts,
to eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the
if the vehicle is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
remote control.
or when RAP is active.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
the DVD player reloads the disc after a short period
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
of time. The disc is stored in the DVD player. The DVD
control.
player does not resume play of the disc automatically.
Some DVDs do not allow fast forwarding or skipping
of the copyright information or the previews. Some Ejecting a Disc (DVD Player with Sunroof)
DVDs begin playing after the previews have finished.
Press and hold the c / X button for more than
If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
to the on-screen instructions. two seconds on the DVD player faceplate to eject the
disc. There is not an eject button on the remote control.
Stopping and Resuming Playback If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop the DVD player reloads the disc after a short period
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote of time. The disc is stored in the DVD player. The DVD
control. player does not resume play of the disc automatically.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on the
DVD player faceplate or the remote control. The movie
should resume play from where it was last stopped, if the
disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not
been pressed twice. If the disc has been ejected or if the
stop button has been pressed twice, the disc resumes
play at the beginning.

3-93
Remote Control Remote Control Buttons
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light can affect
the ability of the RSE system to receive signals from
the remote control. If the remote control does not seem
to be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight can also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs will
not be covered by your warranty. Storage in extreme
cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the remote
control stored in a cool, dry place.

O (Power): Press to turn the DVD player on and off.

v (Title): Press to return the DVD to the main

menu of the DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the

arrows to navigate through a menu.

3-94
z (Set-up Menu): Press to adjust the color, tint, } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press to select chapter,
brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic range title, and track numbers greater than 9. Press before
compression. The dynamic range compression feature inputting the number.
can be used to reduce loud audio and increase low audio
produced by some DVDs. \ (Clear): Press within three seconds to clear a
number that has been entered.
e (Audio): Press to display a menu that only appears
while a DVD is being played. The format and content P (Illumination): Press to turn the remote control
of this function will vary for each disc. backlight on. The backlight times out after about
7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
r (Fast Reverse): Press to fast reverse the DVD or the backlight is on.
CD. To stop fast reversing, press again. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright y (Main DVD Menu): Press to access the DVD menu.
information or the previews. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the DVD navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD
player and an auxiliary source. menu. After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when playing a DVD.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD or CD. Press twice to return to r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
the beginning of the DVD. highlighted in any menu.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to the q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
start of the current track or chapter. Press again to return and return to the previous menu. This button operates
to the previous track or chapter. This button might not only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
work while the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews. | (Camera Angle): Press to change camera angles
on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad The format and content of this function will vary for
provides you with the capability of direct chapter, each disc.
title, and track number selection.

3-95
{ (Subtitle): Press to turn on subtitles and to move Battery Replacement
through subtitle options when a DVD is playing. The To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
format and content of this function will vary for each disc.
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the DVD the bottom of the remote control.
or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press again. This button 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
information or the previews. the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start play of a DVD or CD.
Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press 3. Close the battery door securely.
again to continue the play of the DVD or CD. If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
When the DVD is playing, press this button then press dry place.
the fast forward button. The DVD continues playing
in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode, press
this button.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to advance to the

beginning of the next track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.

3-96
 Problem Recommended Action Problem Recommended Action
No power. The ignition might In auxiliary mode, the Check the auxiliary input
not be in ON/RUN or picture moves or scrolls. connections at both
ACC/ACCESSORY. devices.
The parental control Change the Video Format
button might have been to PAL or NTSC. See
turned on. The power “Stereo RCA Jacks”
indicator light flashes. previously for how to
Disc will not play. The system might be off. change the video format.
The parental control The language in the audio Check the audio or
button might have been or on the screen is wrong. language selection in
turned on. The power the main DVD menu.
indicator light flashes. The remote control does Check to make sure there
The system might be not work. is no obstruction between
in auxiliary mode. the remote control and
The disc is upside down the transmitter window.
or is not compatible. Check the batteries to
The picture does not fill the Check the display make sure they are
screen. There are black mode settings in the not dead or installed
borders on the top and display menu. incorrectly.
bottom or on both sides or The parental control
it looks stretched out. button might have been
The disc was ejected, but The disc is being stored in turned on. The power
it was pulled back into the the DVD player. Press the indicator light flashes.
DVD player. eject button again to eject
the disc.

3-97
 Problem Recommended Action Problem Recommended Action
After stopping the player, I If the stop button was Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions,
push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
the DVD starts where I DVD player resumes or buzzes. range, and interference
left off and sometimes at playing where the DVD from cellular telephone
the beginning. was stopped. If the stop towers or by using your
button was pressed two cellular telephone in the
times the DVD player vehicle.
begins to play from the Check that the
beginning of the DVD. headphones are facing
The auxiliary source is Check that the DVD the front of the vehicle.
running but there is no player is in the auxiliary I lost the remote and/or See your dealer/retailer
picture or sound. source mode. the headphones. for assistance.
Check the auxiliary input The DVD is playing, but Check that the DVD
connections at both there is no picture or player is in DVD mode.
devices. sound.
My disc is stuck in the Turn the DVD power off, The audio/video skips or The DVD or CD could
player. The Load/Eject then on, then press the jumps. be dirty, scratched, or
button does not work. load/eject button on the damaged.
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly The audio from the radio The RSE is working
remove the disc from the for the Radio with correctly.
DVD player. This could Six-Disc CD and XM™ Use the wireless
permanently damage the has taken over the audio headphones or have the
disc and DVD player. from the DVD or CD when front seat passengers
using the wired listen to another audio
headphones. source.

3-98
DVD Messages DVD Distortion
The following errors can display on the video screen: There can be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
Disc Format Error: This message displays if a disc is scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems (GPS)*,
inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable, or two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
Load/Eject Error: This message displays if the disc is operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
not properly loaded or ejected.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Disc Play Error: This message displays if the DVD
player cannot play the disc. Scratched or damaged discs Cleaning the Video Screen
cause this error. Use isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth and
gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray directly onto
Region Code Error: This message displays if the
the screen and do not press too hard or too long on
region code of the DVD is not compatible with the region
the video screen.
code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message displays if any of the buttons
on the DVD faceplate or remote control are pressed and
no disc is present in the DVD player.

3-99
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio, CDs, or DVDs. However, the rear
seat passengers can only control the sources that are not
being listened by the front seat passengers. For example,
rear seat passengers can listen to and control CDs or
DVDs through the headphones while the driver listens
to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set of
headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority over
the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch
the source for the main radio to a remote source,
P (Power): Press this button to turn the system on or
the RSA is not able to control the source. The rear off. The rear speakers are muted when the power is
seat audio can be operated while the main radio is off. turned on.

u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to

decrease the volume. The left volume knob controls
the left wired headphones and the right volume
knob controls the right wired headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a source:
radio, CD, or DVD. The inactive CD or DVD remains
inside the radio for future listening.
SEEK: Press this button to advance to the next station
or track and stay there. The display shows the
selection. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the same audio source.

3-100
To scan preset stations, press and hold the SEEK Audio Steering Wheel Controls
button for two seconds and the radio advances to
the next preset station. If the button continues to be
held down, the radio advances through the available
preset stations. The display shows the selections.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listing to the radio.
While a CD is playing, press the SEEK button to go to
the next track on the CD. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
While a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player, press
and hold the SEEK button for two seconds to go you to
the next CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD. If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
Theft-Deterrent Feature following:

THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your g (OnStar®/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar®,
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by press this button to interact with the OnStar® system.
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number See the OnStar® System on page 2-48 in this manual
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does for more information.
not operate and LOCKED displays.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this button
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking to silence the system. Press it again, or any other
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed. radio button, to turn on the sound.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.

3-101
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station Radio Reception
that has been programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio seeks preset stations only Frequency interference and static during normal radio
with a strong signal that are in the selected band. reception can occur if items such as cellphone chargers,
vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs are there is interference or static, unplug the item from the
loaded. accessory power outlet.
Q SOURCE R: Press the SOURCE arrows to switch AM
between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped),
or a CD. If a CD is loaded the CD symbol displays. The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
Q SEEK R: Press the SEEK arrows to go to frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
the previous or the next radio station and stay there. reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
that are in the selected band. night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
When a CD is playing, press the SEEK arrows to fast happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
forward or reverse.
FM Stereo
Q VOL R (Volume): Press the VOL arrows to
increase or to decrease the volume. FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.

3-102
XM™ Satellite Radio Service XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio System
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In ice build up for clear radio reception.
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM™ XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate interference. Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes Chime Level Adjustment
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
bent, replace it. To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power off.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still The volume level will change from the normal level to
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten loud, and LOUD CHIME will appear on the radio display.
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn. To change back to the default or normal setting, press
and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level will
change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
CHIME will appear on the radio display. Removing the
radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime
module will disable vehicle chimes.

3-103
✍ NOTES

3-104
 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-28
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-28
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-29
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3 Winter Driving ..............................................4-30
Braking .........................................................4-3 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4 Ice, or Snow .............................................4-33
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-34
Locking Rear Axle ..........................................4-5 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-34
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment .......4-40
Steering ......................................................4-10 Towing ..........................................................4-40
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-40
Passing .......................................................4-12 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-40
Loss of Control .............................................4-12 Electronically Controlled
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-13 Air Suspension System ..............................4-44
Driving at Night ............................................4-26 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-45
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-27

4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Drunk Driving
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are judgment can be affected by even a small
for Everyone on page 1-13. amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
{CAUTION: has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will not
Assume that other road users (pedestrians, drink.
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
they might do and be ready. In addition: a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
you and the driver in front of you. vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
• Focus on the task of driving. attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
resulting in injury or possible death. These vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
simple defensive driving techniques could these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
save your life. and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.

4-2
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every Braking
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38.
these laws.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
and then drive. up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
system can make crash injuries worse, especially second. But that is only an average. It might be less
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
if the person had not been drinking. second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
Control of a Vehicle emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
The following three systems help to control your vehicle And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
more of those control systems than the tires and road can icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle. the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.

4-3
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive Antilock Brake System (ABS)
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between an advanced electronic braking system that will
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster if you help prevent a braking skid.
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on.
and longer brake life.
This is normal.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, the If there is a problem with
pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops, ABS, this warning light
you will still have some power brake assist. But you will will stay on. See Antilock
use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, Brake System Warning
it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be Light on page 3-39.
harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3. Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer
for service.

4-4
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. Using ABS
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
happens with ABS: down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might
feel the brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. is normal.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels. Braking in Emergencies
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
driver could. The computer is programmed to make In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
the most of available tire and road conditions. This even the very best braking.
can help you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
Locking Rear Axle
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice,
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes traction to move the vehicle.
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.

4-5
StabiliTrak® System When the StabiliTrak®
system is both on and
Your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, Electronic actively controlling the
Stability Control (ESC) which combines antilock brake, stability of the vehicle,
traction and stability control systems and helps the driver the StabiliTrak® light will
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving blink for the duration of
conditions. the event.
Traction control activates when the controller senses
wheel spin. StabiliTrak® will selectively apply the brakes
and reduce engine torque to help regain traction. You may also feel or hear the system working.
This is normal.
Stability control activates when the controller senses
a discrepancy between your intended path and the The StabiliTrak® disable
direction the vehicle is travelling. StabiliTrak® selectively button is located on the
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s transmission shift handle.
brakes to help guide the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
insure there are no problems. You may hear or feel the
The StabiliTrak® system is automatically disabled in
system working. This is normal and does not mean there
4LO mode and cannot be turned on until the vehicle
is a problem with your vehicle. If driving conditions delay
is switched to 2HI, 4HI, or 4AWD.
system initialization, the STABILITRAK NOT READY
message may be displayed. If this is the case, your The StabiliTrak® system has three modes of operation:
vehicle does not need servicing. STABILITRAK ON, TRACTION CONTROL OFF,
and STABILITRAK OFF.
For more information on the stability messages,
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-53. STABILITRAK ON -The vehicle will default to
STABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts the
vehicle. The StabiliTrak® light will be off and no DIC
messages will be displayed.

4-6
TRACTION CONTROL OFF - The driver can modify StabiliTrak® Off
the engine speed management system by momentarily
pressing the StabiliTrak® button on the transmission In this mode, both stability control and part of the
shift handle. The StabiliTrak® light will come on and traction control system are disabled. Your vehicle will
TRACTION CONTROL OFF will be displayed. For still have brake-traction control, but will not be able
vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak® indicator light to use the engine speed management system. You may
will come on. Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak® still hear system noises as a result of the brake-traction
button again will return the system to the STABILITRAK control coming on. If the controller detects excessive
ON mode. wheel spin in this mode, the StabiliTrak® indicator light
may blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message
STABILITRAK OFF - The driver can turn off StabiliTrak® may be displayed to warn the driver that damage may
by pressing the StabiliTrak® button for more than occur to the transfer case.
five seconds. The StabiliTrak® light will come on and
STABILITRAK OFF will be displayed. For vehicles It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
without a DIC, the StabiliTrak® indicator light will come driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
on. Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak® button again system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
will return the system to the STABILITRAK ON mode. snow, and you may want to “rock” your vehicle in an
See StabiliTrak® Off below for more information. attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions where
Traction Control Off high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-33 for more
In this mode, stability control and brake-traction control information.
are functional. Engine speed management will be
modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely. When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability system is
This can cause the brake-traction control to activate more automatically disabled. The StabiliTrak® light will come
frequently. If the controller detects excessive wheel spin on and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on
in this mode, the StabiliTrak® indicator light may blink and the DIC. The StabiliTrak® system cannot be turned on
the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayed until the vehicle is switched to 2HI, 4HI, or 4AWD.
to warn the driver that damage may occur to the
transfer case.

4-7
The following chart describes the StabiliTrak® system events and the corresponding messages and lights that will be
displayed on the instrument panel cluster.
Vehicles with a DIC Vehicles without a DIC Event
StabiliTrak® StabiliTrak® StabiliTrak® Service
Indicator Light DIC Message Indicator Light Light
—
StabiliTrak® On
mode (System is fully
Off None Off Off enabled, but is not
actively controlling
vehicle stability).
Traction Control
Solid Traction Control Off Solid Off Off Mode
StabiliTrak® Off Mode
(StabiliTrak® indicator
Solid StabiliTrak® Off Solid Off light will flash when
system first enters
this mode).
StabiliTrak® system
activates using
engine speed
Blinking StabiliTrak® Active Blinking Off management, brake
traction control,
and/or stability
control.
StabiliTrak® system is
Solid Service StabiliTrak® Solid Solid disabled due to a
system fault.
StabiliTrak® Not StabiliTrak® system is
Solid Solid Off disabled due to a
Ready failure to initialize.

4-8
Notice: If the StabiliTrak® light comes on due to If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
heavy braking and/or because the traction control activates, the StabiliTrak® light will blink, and the
system has been continuously active, do not allow cruise control will automatically disengage. When
the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively. If you road conditions allow, you may re-engage the cruise
do, you may be causing damage to the transfer case. control. See Cruise Control on page 3-11.
This could lead to costly repairs not covered by your StabiliTrak® will turn off automatically if a problem is
warranty.
detected in the system. The StabiliTrak® light will come
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin on and SERVICE STABILITRAK will be displayed on
excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS and brake the DIC. For vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak®
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK light and the StabiliTrak® service light will both come on.
message are displayed, you could damage the If the SERVICE STABILITRAK message (or StabiliTrak®
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by service light) does not clear itself after restarting the
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and this Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
message are displayed. performance. See Accessories and Modifications
StabiliTrak® may activate on dry or rough roads or on page 5-3 for more information.
under conditions such as heavy acceleration while
turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission.
When this happens, you may notice a reduction in
acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.
This is normal.

4-9
Steering Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
Power Steering systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
If you lose power steering assist because the engine the sudden acceleration can demand too much of
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer those places. You can lose control.
but it will take much more effort. What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
Steering Tips the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
the news happen on curves. Here is why: are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you front wheels are straight ahead.
turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through
keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,
understand this. and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you Modifications on page 5-3.
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

4-10
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the
time for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-3.
It is better to remove as much speed as you can
from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-11
Off-Road Recovery Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
driving. we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the Let us review what driving experts say about what
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the happens when the three control systems — brakes,
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn asked.
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.

4-12
Skidding While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving slide. You might not realize the surface is slippery until
those conditions. But skids are always possible. your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much when you have any doubt.
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much avoid only the braking skid.
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off Off-Road Driving
the accelerator pedal.
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
drive. Also, see Braking on page 4-3. If your vehicle does
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
not have four-wheel drive, you should not drive off-road
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
unless you are on a level, solid surface.
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs. The airbag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
you want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
surfaces because stopping distance is longer and some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
vehicle control more limited. the terrain itself.

4-13
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are
not marked. Curves are not banked. There are no Driving
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that {CAUTION:
is why it is very important that you read this guide.
You will find many driving tips and suggestions. These • Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
will help make your off-road driving safer and more the seatbacks can be thrown forward during
enjoyable. a sudden stop. You or your passengers
could be injured. Keep cargo below the
Before You Go Off-Roading top of the seatbacks.
There are some things to do before you go out. • Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance tossed about when driving over rough
and service work done. Check to make sure all terrain. You or your passengers can be
underbody shields, if the vehicle has them, are struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly attached. properly.
Be sure you read all the information about your • Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
are the local laws that apply to off-roading where you will Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward
be driving? If you do not know, you should check with and low as possible.
law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.

4-14
There are some important things to remember about • Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
how to load your vehicle. removed from any campsite before leaving.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and • Take extreme care with open fires where permitted,
forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far camp stoves, and lanterns.
forward as you can.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on combustible materials that could catch fire from
the off-road terrain does not toss things around. the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34, Luggage Traveling to Remote Areas
Carrier on page 2-58, and Tires on page 5-57. It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when
going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
Environmental Concerns route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
recreation. However, it also raises environmental any blocked or closed roads.
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
environment: can help quickly.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
have been specially set aside for public off-road the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations. handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know how to
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the use it properly.
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife. This includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees, or unnecessary driving
through streams or over soft ground.

4-15
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe {CAUTION:
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
skills. Here is what we mean.
quick changes in direction can easily throw
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your you out of position. This could cause you to
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain lose control and crash. So, whether you are
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen driving on or off the road, you and your
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
passengers should wear safety belts.
hands, feet, and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road Scanning the Terrain
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
in mind. At higher speeds: of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its
many different features. Here are some things to
• You approach things faster and you have less time consider.
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• You have less time to react. Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
• You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
obstacles. acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different
• You will need more distance for braking, especially ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
since you are on an unpaved surface.
delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking
distances.

4-16
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these sudden turns, or sudden braking.
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some things alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
to consider: There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal
• Is the path ahead clear? lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? There is road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
more discussion of these subjects later. At the very time you need special alertness and driving
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
quickly? affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other See Drunk Driving on page 4-2.
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.

4-17
Driving on Off-Road Hills incline with only a small change in elevation where you
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle. Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
{CAUTION: sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. surface cause tire slipping?
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive • Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
down them, you cannot control your speed. If will not have to make turning maneuvers?
you drive across them, you will roll over. You • Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill. • What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart
Approaching a Hill way to find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend, they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant

4-18
Driving Uphill • Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps. • Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel. • Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make your vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want the wheels to
start spinning or sliding. {CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
{CAUTION: can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
Turning or driving across steep hills can be vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed.
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide As you near the top of a hill, slow down and
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could stay alert.
be seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up. There are some things you should do if the vehicle stalls,
or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up the hill:
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. • Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it
If the path twists and turns, you might want to from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
find another route. brake.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of • If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
the hill. REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

4-19
 • If the engine has stopped running, you will need to • Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission your vehicle, it is steep enough to cause you to roll
to PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to over if you turn around. If you cannot make it up the
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and hill, you must back straight down the hill.
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
in REVERSE (R). you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put the
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand transmission in PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side
way, you will be able to tell if the wheels are straight and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled
and maneuver as you back down. It is best that you downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL
back down the hill with the wheels straight rather when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover. {CAUTION:
There are also some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill: Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go overrides the transmission. You or someone
out of control. else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R),
the transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave the
release the parking brake, and slowly back
transfer case in the Two-Wheel High,
straight down.
Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Low position.

4-20
Driving Downhill There some things not to do when driving down a hill.
These are important because, if you ignore them,
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to you could lose control and have a serious accident:
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain • When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
vehicle control? across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too steep
to drive down may be too steep to drive across. You
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough? could roll over if you do not drive straight down.
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? • Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Boulders?
The brakes will have to do all the work and could
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden overheat and fade.
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
Your vehicle is much more likely to stall when going
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try uphill. But if it happens when going downhill:
to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help the brakes and 1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
they will not have to do all the work. Descend slowly, Apply the parking brake.
keeping your vehicle under control at all times. 2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
{CAUTION: and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to
keep vehicle speed under control.

4-21
Driving Across an Incline • Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go grass can cause the tires to slip sideways, downhill.
across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
to decide whether to try to drive across the incline. will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
Here are some things to consider:
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
{CAUTION: uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
make your vehicle roll over. You could be the trail goes across the incline does not mean you
seriously injured or killed. If you have any have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do have rolled over.
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
When driving across an incline that is not too steep,
the vehicle can hit some loose gravel and start to slide
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be downhill. If you feel your vehicle starting to slide
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
distance from the front wheels to the rear a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will “walk the course” so you know what the surface is
tumble end over end. But when you drive across an like before you drive it.
incline, the much more narrow track width — the
distance between the left and right wheels — may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.

4-22
Stalling on an Incline

{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side
of a vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.

If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,

be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open.
If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle
starts to roll over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

4-23
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that
will not get good traction. You cannot accelerate you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
need longer braking distances. you to slide out of control.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not get {CAUTION:
stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
on beaches or sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating, you and your passengers could drown. Drive
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
turns or abrupt maneuvers.

4-24
Driving in Water If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get the tailpipe under water. And, as long as the tailpipe
{CAUTION: is under water, you will never be able to start the engine.
When you go through water, remember that when the
Driving through rushing water can be brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-27 for
downstream and you and your passengers more information on driving through water.
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your After Off-Road Driving
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing the underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
water. accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
demand extreme caution. glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system
it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles, for any leakage.
or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will not get
through. Also, water that deep can damage the axle Your vehicle will require more frequent service due
and other vehicle parts. to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.

4-25
Driving at Night • Watch for animals.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving • When tired, pull off the road.
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by • Do not wear sunglasses.
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue. • Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

Night driving tips include: • Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Drive defensively.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
• Do not drink and drive. curves.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
rearview mirror. But, as we get older, these differences increase.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
other vehicles because your headlamps can only light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
light up so much road ahead.

4-26
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This
drive slower in these types of driving conditions can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going
and avoid driving through large puddles and fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has
deep-standing or flowing water. little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{CAUTION: Other Rainy Weather Tips
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
work as well in a quick stop and could cause include:
pulling to one side. You could lose control of • Allow extra following distance.
the vehicle.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally. • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
forces. Driving through flowing water could on page 5-57.
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.

4-27
Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing. while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
Things to check on your own include: safe place to park your vehicle and rest.

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows Other driving tips include:
clean — inside and outside? • Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Wiper Blades: In good shape? • Keep interior temperature cool.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked? • Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? and to the sides.

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date
maps?

4-28
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different {CAUTION:
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include: Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape. ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
could get so hot that they would not work well.
system, and transmission.
You would then have poor braking or even
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a none going down a hill. You could crash.
lower gear. Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

{CAUTION:
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
that let you stay in your own lane.
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none • Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down lane (stalled car, accident).
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep • Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
downhill slope. area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-13 for information
about driving off-road.

4-29
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,
a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-57.

Driving on Snow or Ice

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can
road probably have good traction.
be even more trouble because it can offer the least
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
very careful. can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.

4-30
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more. If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. passengers safe:
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road. • Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you
have been stopped by the snow.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.

4-31
 {CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-32
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the severe for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to the traction system off and use the rocking method.
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost {CAUTION:
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the speed, they can explode, and you or others
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes. causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, shown on the speedometer.
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. see Tire Chains on page 5-80.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-34.

4-33
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the It is very important to know how much weight your
area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel High. Turn off any traction capacity weight and includes the weight of all
or stability system. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop and Loading Information label and the Certification/
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator Tire label.
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that could free your
{CAUTION:
vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out after a few
tries, it might need to be towed out. If your vehicle does Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
page 4-40. or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.

4-34
Tire and Loading Information Label The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 5-57 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-64.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information vehicle.
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
label attached below the door lock post (striker). and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The Tire and Loading Information label shows
the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.

4-35
 4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4. Example 1
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your Item Description Total
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how Vehicle Capacity
this reduces the available cargo and luggage 1,000 lbs
A Weight for
(453 kg)
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing a Example 1 =
Trailer on page 4-45 for important information Subtract
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and B Occupant Weight 300 lbs (136 kg)
trailering tips. 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
C Available Occupant 700 lbs (317 kg)
and Cargo Weight =

4-36
 Example 2 Example 3

Item Description Total Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity Vehicle Capacity
1,000 lbs 1,000 lbs
A Weight for A Weight for
(453 kg) (453 kg)
Example 2 = Example 3 =
Subtract Subtract
1,000 lbs
B Occupant Weight 750 lbs (136 kg) B Occupant Weight (453 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
C Available Cargo 250 lbs (113 kg) C Available Cargo 0 lbs (0 kg)
Weight = Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s
capacity weight.
4-37
Your vehicle may have an electronically controlled This is called Gross Vehicle Weight
air suspension system that automatically keeps Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
your vehicle level as you load and unload weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo,
your vehicle. See Electronically Controlled Air and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
Suspension System on page 4-44 for additional The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
information. maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
Certification/Tire Label called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,
you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally on both sides of the
centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different
GVWRs and capacity weights. Please note your
vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consult your
dealer for additional details.

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is

found on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tires and the inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.

4-38
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than Things you put inside your vehicle can
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or either the maximum front or rear Gross or turn, or in a crash.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, • Put things in the cargo area of your
parts on your vehicle can break, and it vehicle. Try to spread the weight
can change the way your vehicle handles. evenly.
These could cause you to lose control • Never stack heavier things, like
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
the life of your vehicle. some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
Using heavier suspension components to get • Do not leave an unsecured child
added durability might not change your vehicle’s restraint in your vehicle.
weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you • When you carry something inside the
load your vehicle the right way. vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause you need to.
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
There is also important loading information for
If you put things inside your vehicle — like off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to Driving on page 4-13.
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.

4-39
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Recreational Vehicle Towing
Equipment Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended for a The two most common types of recreational vehicle
snow plow. towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
Notice: Adding a snow plow or similar equipment (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground
to your vehicle can damage it, and the repairs would and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
not be covered by warranty. Do not install a snow
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
plow or similar equipment on your vehicle.
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. You may also
Towing need brakes for the vehicle being towed. See your
dealer for additional trailering information.
Here are some important things to consider before you
Towing Your Vehicle do recreational vehicle towing:
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing • What’s the trailering capacity of the towing vehicle?
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8. recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle restrictions on how far and how long they can
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), be towed.
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See
your dealer or trailering professional for additional
advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-28.
4-40
Dinghy Towing Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles, they
should be placed on a platform trailer.

Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be dinghy towed if you

follow the proper procedures. The transmission has
no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed,
so it is important that you follow all the steps listed
in this manual to dinghy tow your four-wheel-drive
vehicle.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.

4-41
 4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow Dolly Towing
vehicle.
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off
the Ground)
{CAUTION: Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to could be damaged. The repairs would not be
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle
You or others could be injured. Make sure the with the rear wheels on the ground.
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be dolly towed with the
rear wheels on the ground.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-29 for the proper Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position 1. Drive the vehicle onto the tow dolly.
for your vehicle.
2. Shift the automatic transmission to PARK (P).
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing 3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
vehicle. 4. Firmly set the parking brake.
7. Turn the ignition off. 5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under the dolly.
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-29.

4-42
 Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
{CAUTION: the Ground)
(Two-Wheel or Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.

6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See

Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-29 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position for
your vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition off. Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under the rear:
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-29. 1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-33 for more information.
3. Shift the transmission in PARK (P).

4-43
 4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to The system also has an internal clock to prevent
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to overheating if the inflator is used for prolonged periods.
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow If the system overheats, all leveling function stops
vehicle. Use an adequate clamping device to ensure until the system cools down. During this time, the
that the front wheels are locked into the straight indicator light on the air inflator switch will be flashing.
position. The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate,
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle in order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height
being towed is firmly attached to the towing after loading. The system can lower the vehicle to
vehicle. the standard ride height after unloading with the ignition
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK. on and also for up to 30 minutes after the ignition
has been turned off.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for
six weeks or more, remove the battery cable You may hear the compressor operating when you load
from the negative terminal (post) of the battery. your vehicle, and periodically as the system adjusts
the vehicle to the standard ride height.
Electronically Controlled Air Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator
hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove the inflator
Suspension System hose from the outlet during loading and unloading.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronically If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time,
controlled air suspension system that automatically some bleed down of the suspension is normal. Upon
keeps your vehicle level as you load and unload. starting the vehicle, proper height will be achieved.
The system includes a compressor, two height
sensors and two air springs supporting the rear axle.

4-44
Overload Protection Towing a Trailer
The air suspension system is equipped with overload
protection. Overload protection is designed to protect
the air suspension system, and it is an indicator to {CAUTION:
the driver that the vehicle is overloaded. When
the overload protection mode is on, it will not allow If you do not use the correct equipment and
damage to the air compressor. However, do not drive properly, you can lose control when you
overload the vehicle. See Loading Your Vehicle
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
on page 4-34.
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
If the suspension remains at a low height, the rear at all. You and your passengers could be
axle load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight seriously injured. You may also damage your
Rating). When the overload protection mode is activated,
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one
minute without raising the vehicle depending on the covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
amount of overload. This will continue each time you have followed all the steps in this section.
the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
reduced below GAWR. information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Indicator Light
The indicator light on the inflator switch in the rear
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
passenger compartment also serves as an indicator for
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
internal system error. If the indicator light is flashing
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
without the load leveling function or the inflator being
the instructions in this section and check with your
active, turn off the ignition. The next day turn on the
dealer/retailer for more information about towing
ignition and check the indicator light. The vehicle can
a trailer with your vehicle.
be driven with the light flashing, but if it is you should
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.

4-45
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by • Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking, a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier
be used properly. loads.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many • You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
Many of these are important for your safety and that of gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
your passengers. So please read this section carefully (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
before you pull a trailer.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer • the weight of the trailer,
If you do, here are some important points: • the weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit • and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also Weight of the Trailer
where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police. How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later in It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
this section. speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles important. It can also depend on any special equipment
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, that you have on your vehicle, and the amount of tongue
axle or other parts could be damaged. weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.

4-46
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required weight for your vehicle.
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Max.Trailer Wt. *GCWR

3.42 5,300 lbs (2 404 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
2WD Envoy (4.2 L L6 Engine) 3.73 5,800 lbs (2 631 kg) 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
4.10 6,300 lbs (2 858 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
3.42 6,100 lbs (2 767 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
2WD Envoy (5.3 L V8 Engine)
3.73 6,600 lbs (2 994 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
3.42 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
4WD Envoy (4.2 L L6 Engine) 3.73 5,700 lbs (2 858 kg) 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
4.10 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
3.42 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
4WD Envoy (5.3 L V8 Engine)
3.73 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.

Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice,

or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See
Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for more
information.

4-47
Weight of the Trailer Tongue The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (A), up to a
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight maximum of 900 lbs (408 kg) for a weight distributing
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of hitch.
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your on the rear axle.
vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle for are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get
more information about your vehicle’s maximum load them right simply by moving some items around
capacity. in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to

15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying hitch.
4-48
Consider the following example: But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
a GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight itself, as
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle
to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider
could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).
the effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg),
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

4-49
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is door or see Loading Your Vehicle for more information.
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg). Then, be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for
your vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch,
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The you apply the weight distribution spring bars.
only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of
these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer. Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.

4-50
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
Carrying Hitches when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer will
weigh more than these limits. You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.

Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle Trailer Brakes
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs. (680 kg)
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they must
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle. be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample and maintain them properly.
room when turning to avoid contact between the Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, your
trailer and the bumper. trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will brake system.
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
4-51
Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll
want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the
{CAUTION: trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
If you have a rear-most window open and you responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
(CO) could come into your vehicle. You can not attachments, safety chains, electrical connection, lamps,
see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
or death. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-37. brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
To maximize your safety when towing a trailer: apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
• Have your exhaust system inspected for electrical connection at the same time.
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
• Keep the rear-most windows closed. the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle brakes are still working.
through a window in the rear or another Following Distance
opening, drive with your front, main heating
or cooling system on and with the fan on Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
into your vehicle. Do not use the climate This can help you avoid situations that require
control setting for maximum air because it heavy braking and sudden turns.
only recirculates the air inside your vehicle.
See Dual Climate Control System on
page 3-21.

4-52
Passing When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. bulbs are still working.
Backing Up Driving On Grades
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down,
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, you might have to use your brakes so much that they
have someone guide you. would get hot and no longer work well.

Making Turns You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear, under heavy
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering loads or hilly conditions.
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
making very sharp turns while trailering. temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever get the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, on page 5-28.
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

4-53
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
You really should not park your vehicle, with a parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the can move suddenly. You or others could be
trailer can be damaged. injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
how to do it:
the parking brake firmly set.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your wheels If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
your wheels into the curb. even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
wheels. in NEUTRAL.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-29.
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.

4-54
When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
while you: on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
• start your engine, engine oil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system and
• shift into a gear, and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
• release the parking brake. trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before
2. Let up on the brake pedal. you start your trip.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.

4-55
Trailer Wiring Harness The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Running Lamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed
• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
available from your dealer.
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, turn
on the headlamps to boost the vehicle system voltage
Your vehicle may be equipped with the seven-wire
and properly charge the battery.
trailer towing harness. This harness has a seven-pin
universal heavy-duty trailer connector (if equipped with Your vehicle may also be equipped with wiring for an
the trailering package) that is attached to a bracket electric trailer brake controller. These wires are located
on the hitch platform. If your vehicle is not equipped with inside the vehicle on the driver’s side under the
the heavy-duty trailer connector, you may purchase instrument panel. These wires should be connected to
one from your dealer. an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer or
a qualified service center.

4-56
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3 Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-35
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3 Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4 Brakes ........................................................5-38
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Battery ........................................................5-41
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5 Rear Axle .......................................................5-46
Fuel ................................................................5-5 Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-47
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-6
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6 Front Axle ......................................................5-48
California Fuel ...............................................5-6 Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-49
Additives .......................................................5-7 Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-49
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7 Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-49
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8 Headlamps ..................................................5-50
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10 Parking Lamps ..........................................5-51
Hood Release ..............................................5-11 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-51
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12 Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-53
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16 License Plate Lamp ......................................5-53
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19 Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-54
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-54
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-23
Tires ..............................................................5-57
Engine Coolant .............................................5-26
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-58
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-28
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-61
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-64
Cooling System ............................................5-30

5-1
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
High-Speed Operation ...................................5-66 Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-103
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-67 Weatherstrips .............................................5-103
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-69 Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-103
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-72 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-104
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-73 Finish Care ................................................5-104
Buying New Tires .........................................5-74 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .......5-105
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-76 Aluminum Wheels .......................................5-105
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-77 Tires .........................................................5-106
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-78 Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-106
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-78 Finish Damage ...........................................5-106
Tire Chains ..................................................5-80 Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-106
Accessory Inflator .........................................5-80 Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-106
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-81 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-107
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-82 Vehicle Identification .....................................5-108
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-84 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-108
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-108
Spare Tire ................................................5-87
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-92 Electrical System ..........................................5-109
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-96 Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-109
Spare Tire ...................................................5-99 Headlamps .................................................5-109
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-109
Appearance Care ..........................................5-100 Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-109
Interior Cleaning .........................................5-100 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-110
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-101 Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-110
Leather ......................................................5-102 Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..........................5-116
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .......................................5-102 Capacities and Specifications ........................5-120

5-2
Service Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
supported service people. and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction
or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-66.

5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive {CAUTION:
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and You can be injured and your vehicle could be
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit damaged if you try to do service work on a
these chemicals.
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
California Perchlorate Materials experience, the proper replacement parts,
Requirements and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries other fasteners. English and metric
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may fasteners can be easily confused. If you
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
be necessary. For additional information, see break or fall off. You could be hurt.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

5-4
If you want to do some of your own service work, you Adding Equipment to the Outside of
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this Your Vehicle
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16. Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
do your own service work, see Servicing Your performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66. adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

5-5
Gasoline Octane California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you California specifications. See the underhood emission
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the emission control system performance might be affected.
engine needs service. The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-41. If this occurs, return to your
Gasoline Specifications authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 repairs might not be covered by your warranty.
in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7 for
additional information.

5-6
Additives Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
are now required to contain additives that help prevent (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the emission control system to work properly. In most the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum emission control system could be affected. The
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors return to your dealer/retailer for service.
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline Fuels in Foreign Countries
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and If you plan on driving in another country outside the
prevent most deposit-related problems. United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
in your area. We recommend that you use these repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described be covered by your warranty.
earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in contact a major oil company that does business in the
vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. country where you will be driving.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.

5-7
Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.

5-8
 There may also be a light that comes on in the
instrument panel to let you know if your gas cap is not
{CAUTION: properly installed. See Check Gas Cap Light on
page 3-49 for more information.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly {CAUTION:
burned. This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
Vehicle on page 5-103. properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been on page 3-41.
left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-41.

5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
{CAUTION:
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
can be badly burned and your vehicle and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
you and others: other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
• Dispense fuel only into approved
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.

5-10
Hood Release
1. To open the hood, first
pull the handle with this
symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle under the
instrument panel on the
driver’s side.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the

secondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood, release the prop rod from its retainer
and put the prop rod into the slot in the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
prop rod. Remove the prop rod from its slot in the hood
and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the hood
6 to 8 inches (15 to 20 cm) above the vehicle and release
it to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is closed
and repeat the process if necessary.

5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 4.2L L6 engine, here is what you will see:

5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. on page 5-28.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
on page 5-30. under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid See Jump Starting on page 5-42.
on page 5-37. J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering under Brakes on page 5-38.
Fluid on page 5-36. K. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View). L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-110.
Transmission Fluid on page 5-23.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

5-13
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

5-14
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-30. on page 5-28.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. See Jump Starting on page 5-42.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid Fluid on page 5-36.
on page 5-37. J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under Brakes on page 5-38.
under Engine Oil on page 5-16. K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-110.
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic L. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
Transmission Fluid on page 5-23.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

5-15
Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. L6 Engine
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

V8 Engine

5-16
If the oil is below the L mark for the L6 engine or the See Engine Compartment
cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick for the Overview on page 5-12 for
V8 engine, add at least one quart/liter of the the location of the engine
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil to oil fill cap.
use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-120.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area (F) that shows the proper
operating range for the L6 engine or above the
cross-hatched area for the V8 engine, the engine
could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.

5-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an
oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).

5-18
Look for this information on the oil container, and Engine Oil Life System
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst When to Change Engine Oil
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
oil can result in engine damage not covered by considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
your warranty. must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the When the system has calculated that oil life has been
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 A change engine oil light will come on, and, if your vehicle
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier has a Driver Information Center (DIC), a CHANGE
cold starting and better protection for the engine at ENGINE OIL message will come on. See the oil as soon
extremely low temperatures. as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).

Engine Oil Additives

Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance
and engine protection.

5-19
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best To reset the Engine Oil Life System:
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the
change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine engine off.
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
has trained people who will perform this work using three times within five seconds.
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to The change engine oil light will flash while the
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. system is resetting.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must 3. When the light stops flashing, turn the key to
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil LOCK/OFF.
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. If the light/message comes back on when you start the
vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life Repeat the procedure.
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE OIL
message being turned on, reset the system.

5-20
What to Do with Used Oil Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. See Engine Compartment
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean Overview on page 5-12 for
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good the location of the
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or engine air cleaner/filter.
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer, a When to Inspect the Engine Air
service station, or a local recycling center for help.
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.

5-21
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter {CAUTION:
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is off can cause you or others to be burned.
required. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not
following: there and the engine backfires, you could be
1. Remove the screws on the engine air cleaner/filter burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
and lift off the cover. working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws. cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.

5-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
When to Check and Change Automatic • When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
Transmission Fluid • At high speed for quite a while.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid • In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
level is when the engine oil is changed.
• While pulling a trailer.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
(82°C to 93°C).
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
How to Check Automatic Transmission (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
Fluid (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage moves
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department. A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too
give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.

5-23
Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
Prepare your vehicle as follows: 1. Flip the handle up and then remove the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running. The automatic
transmission dipstick
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever handle with this symbol on
in PARK (P). it is located in the engine
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift compartment on the
lever through each gear range, pausing for about passenger’s side of the
three seconds in each range. Then, position the vehicle.
shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
2. Reinstall it back in all the way, wait three seconds
and then pull it back out again. If the dipstick does
not go down the tube easily, turn the blade and
try again until it is fully inserted in the tube.

5-24
 How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area, Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check. may not be covered by your warranty. Always
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
accurate reading. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, reinstall • After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle under “How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid,”
down to lock the dipstick in place. earlier in this section.
Consistency of Readings • When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the to lock the dipstick in place.
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If
inconsistent readings persist, contact your dealer/retailer.

5-25
Engine Coolant What to Use
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed one-half DEX-COOL® coolant. If you use this coolant
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to {CAUTION:
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
page 5-28.
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C). coolant warning system is set for the proper
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
would not get the overheat warning. Your
• Help keep the proper engine temperature. engine could catch fire and you or others could
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
should. drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-26
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, Checking Coolant
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your The engine coolant
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze recovery tank is in the
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and engine compartment on
other parts. the passenger’s side of the
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, vehicle. The cap has this
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system. symbol on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives on page 5-12 for more
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could information on location.
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher.

5-27
Adding Coolant Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
® For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL
see Cooling System on page 5-30.
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

Radiator Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
secured.
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
almost never have to add coolant at the information on location.
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and Engine Overheating
radiator are hot.
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful Temperature Gage on page 3-40 for more information.
not to spill it. If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot/Engine
Overheated message. See DIC Warnings and Messages
{CAUTION: on page 3-53 for more information.

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot

engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-28
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
{CAUTION: If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam • Stop after high-speed driving.
coming from it. Just turn it off and get • Idle for long periods in traffic.
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
• Tow a trailer.
coolant before you open the hood. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You 1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
or others could be badly burned. Stop your while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
engine idle.
until the engine is cool.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.

5-29
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can Cooling System
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
normally. you will see:
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

5.3L V8 Engine shown, 4.2L L6 Engine similar

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
Do not do anything if the engine coolant is boiling. Wait
until it cools down. Park vehicle on a level surface.

5-30
 The coolant level should If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
be at least up to the FULL The engine cooling fan speed should increase when
COLD mark. If it is not, idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
you may have a leak at the down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service.
pressure cap or in the Turn off the engine.
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
pump, or somewhere else without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
in the cooling system. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.

5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Recovery Tank Use the recommended coolant and the proper
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant coolant mixture.
level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See {CAUTION:
Engine Coolant on page 5-26 for more information.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
{CAUTION: and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
would not get the overheat warning. The system is cool before you do it.
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

5-32
 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when

the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.

5-33
 3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL® 4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler COLD mark.
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-26 for more 5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
information about the proper coolant mixture. leave the radiator pressure cap off.

5-34
 Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages so
you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal
and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping
or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system
functioning properly. The fan will slow down when
additional cooling is not required and the clutch
disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

5-35
Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
reservoir location. cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the level should
be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles with the 5.3L V8
When to Check Power Steering Fluid engine, the level should be at the FULL mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid level up to the mark.
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could What to Use
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired. To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
be operating your vehicle in an area where the Water can cause the solution to freeze and
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
has sufficient protection against freezing. of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid • Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
Open the cap with the
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
washer symbol on it.
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
Compartment Overview windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
on page 5-12 for reservoir windshield washer system and paint.
location.

5-37
Brakes It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
Brake Fluid the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when
new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake
fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake
The brake master cylinder
hydraulic system.
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for {CAUTION:
the location of the reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
in this section.
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, you on page 6-4.
should have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not
work well.

5-38
Checking Brake Fluid
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the {CAUTION:
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not, hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
have the brake hydraulic well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
system checked to proper brake fluid.
see if there is a leak.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
the brake hydraulic system can damage brake
hydraulic system parts so badly that they will
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in
sure the level is above the MIN, but not over the the wrong kind of fluid.
MAX mark. • If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
What to Add careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container Your Vehicle on page 5-103.
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.

5-39
Brake Wear Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning the brakes.
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
pushing on the brake pedal firmly. brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-120.
{CAUTION: Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that Brake Pedal Travel
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
wear warning sound, have your vehicle pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
serviced. might be required.

Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair. Every time you make a brake stop, the disc brakes
adjust for wear.

5-40
Replacing Brake System Parts Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle {CAUTION:
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
example, when the brake linings wear down and you that can explode. You can be badly hurt if
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
you are not careful. See Jump Starting on
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance without getting hurt.
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
Battery remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for the charge of the battery over an extended period
one that has the replacement number shown on the of time.
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.

5-41
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to by your warranty.
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start Your vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it pulling it, and can be damage by trying it.
safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION: Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
because:
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
• They contain acid that can burn you. can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
• They contain gas that can explode or each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
ignite. connection you do not want. You would not be able
• They contain enough electricity to to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
burn you. damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
or all of these things can hurt you. the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.

5-42
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by {CAUTION:
your warranty. Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle. Using a match near a battery can cause battery
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette this, and some have been blinded. Use a
lighter or the accessory power outlets, if equipped. flashlight if you need more light.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help to save Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
both batteries. And it could save the radio! not need to add water to the battery installed
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on each caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) jump If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
starting terminal. You should always use this If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
remote terminal instead of the terminal on the
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
battery. The remote negative (−) terminal is located
on the front engine lift bracket on vehicles with the Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
4.2L L6 engine or the engine accessory drive bracket in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
for vehicles with the 5.3L V8 engine, and is marked with water and get medical help immediately.
GND (Ground). See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.

5-43
 6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
{CAUTION: positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure Use a remote
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
parts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or

missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
get a short that would damage the battery and remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the Do not let the other end touch anything until the
dead battery because this can cause sparks. next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal, marked GND, for this purpose.

5-44
 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.

4.2L L6 Engine 5.3L V8 Engine

The remote negative (−) terminal is located on
the front engine lift bracket for the 4.2L L6 engine,
and on the accessory drive bracket for the
5.3L V8 engine.

5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or Disconnect the jumper cables in reverse order that they
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may were installed. Do the following:
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect vehicle that had the dead battery.
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each other 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
or other metal. vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.

Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote

Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

5-46
How to Check Lubricant Four-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate
reading, the vehicle should
be on a level surface.

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a

level surface.
The proper level is from 0 to 0.40 inch (0 to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the
rear axle.

What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug
hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

5-47
What to Use How to Check Lubricant
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a

level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add some
lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 0.50 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.

5-48
What to Use Bulb Replacement
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. Replacement Bulbs on page 5-54.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
Headlamp Aiming section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment. Halogen Bulbs
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming {CAUTION:
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
recommended that you take the vehicle to your You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
dealer/retailer for service.
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.

5-49
Headlamps 4. Remove the cover from the headlamp bulb.
5. Remove the bulb socket that needs to be replaced
To replace one of these bulbs: by turning it counterclockwise.
1. Open the hood. Hood Release on page 5-11 for 6. Disconnect the electrical connector from the
more information. old bulb.
2. Lift the two headlamp retaining clips. 7. Plug the electrical connector into the new bulb
using care not to touch the glass with your
fingers.
8. Install the new bulb into the socket and turn it
clockwise to secure.
9. Reinstall by reversing Steps 1 through 6.
10. Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to
secure the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle

to access the electrical connectors.

5-50
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps Stoplamps
To replace one of these bulbs: To replace a stoplamp/taillamp or turn signal bulb:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 under Headlamps on 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass on
page 5-50 to access the front turn signal, page 2-12 for more information.
sidemarker or parking lamp.
2. Remove the
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove two screws from the
it from the lamp assembly. taillamp assembly.
3. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to release it
from the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to secure.
6. Reinstall the headlamp assembly by lining up the
headlamp assembly with the slots in the headlamp
retaining clips.
7. Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to
secure the headlamp assembly.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.

5-51
 5. Remove the socket plate.
6. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it from
the socket.
7. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
8. Reinstall the socket plate and tighten the
three screws.
9. Reconnect the wiring harness.
10. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by lining up the
locator pins with the retainers in the body of the
vehicle.
11. Reinstall the two screws and tighten.
12. Close the liftgate.
4. Unclip the wiring harness (A) and remove the
three socket retaining screws (B).

5-52
Back-Up Lamps License Plate Lamp
The back-up lamps are 1. Remove the two screws holding the license plate
located in the rear bumper. lamp lens.
To replace a bulb:

1. Reach behind the rear bumper and locate the bulb

socket.
2. Turn it counterclockwise to remove from the lamp
assembly.
2. Pull the lens away from the lamp assembly.
3. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to release it
from the socket. 3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
4. Push in a new bulb into the bulb socket until it
clicks. 5. Replace the lamp assembly lens and tighten the
5. Reinstall the bulb socket into the lamp assembly screws.
and turn it clockwise to secure.

5-53
Replacement Bulbs be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the windshield.
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number 1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
Back-up Lamps/Rear Turn Signal 3157
Lamp, Stoplamp, and Taillamp
Front Sidemarker Lamps 194
Front Turn Signal Lamps 3457
License Plate Lamp W5W
High-Beam Headlamps 9005 HB3
Low-Beam Headlamps 9006 HB4
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.

Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. A. Blade Assembly D. Blade Pivot
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield B. Arm Assembly E. Hook Slot
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the C. Locking Tab F. Arm Hook
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not 2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.

5-54
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.

A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D), C. Incorrect Installation
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the 6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully hook slot.
inserted.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom onto the windshield.
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.

5-55
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement 3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of
the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and
push the blade away from the wiper arm.

1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the

park rest position.
4. Replace the wiper blade.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not 5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest
lock in a vertical position, so care should be used position.
when pulling it away from the vehicle.

5-56
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where • Underinflated tires pose the same
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty danger as overloaded tires. The
booklet for details. resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
{CAUTION: your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-64.
• Poorly maintained and improperly • Overinflated tires are more likely
used tires are dangerous. to be cut, punctured, or broken by
• Overloading your tires can cause a sudden impact — such as when
overheating as a result of too much you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
flexing. You could have an air-out and recommended pressure.
a serious accident. See Loading Your • Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
Vehicle on page 4-34. If your tread is badly worn, or if
CAUTION: (Continued) your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 5-66
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.

5-57
Low-Profile Performance Tire Tire Sidewall Labeling
If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires, they are Useful information about a tire is molded into the
classified as low-profile performance tires. These sidewall. The following illustration is an example
tires are designed for very responsive driving on of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. Your vehicle
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination

of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-58
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria (E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
Specification): Original equipment tires designed number of plies in the sidewall and under
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have the tread.
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
federal safety guidelines. Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Grading on page 5-77.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters maximum pressure needed to support that load.
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire For information on recommended tire pressure
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.

5-59
Tire Size (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
The following examples show the different parts of For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
a tire size. shown in item C of the passenger (P-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States inches.
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a (F) Service Description: The service description
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards indicates the load range and speed rating of a
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.

5-60
Tire Terminology and Definitions Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square page 5-64.
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
Accessory Weight: This means the combined standard and optional equipment including the
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
optional accessories are, automatic transmission, without passengers and cargo.
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
to its width. motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
located between the plies and the tread. Cords an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
may be made from steel or other reinforcing the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
materials. date of production.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees the front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on
to the centerline of the tread. page 4-34.

5-61
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34. at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
outward when mounted on a vehicle. curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
vehicles. on page 4-34.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load positions.
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.

5-62
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that the tire beads are seated.
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and the bead.
and/or model name molding that is higher or Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
deeper than the same moldings on the other a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
sidewall of the tire. tire can operate.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on Traction: The friction between the tire and the
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and road surface. The amount of grip provided.
multipurpose vehicles.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle contact with the road.
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64 called wear bars, that show across the tread of
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34. a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply on page 5-73.
cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

5-63
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Inflation - Tire Pressure
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings operate effectively.
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-77. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of • Too much flexing
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. • Too much heat
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34. • Tire overloading
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on • Premature or irregular wear
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory • Poor handling
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
• Reduced fuel economy
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight you can get the following:
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and • Unusual wear
Loading Information Label” under Loading • Poor handling
Your Vehicle on page 4-34. • Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

5-64
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information When to Check
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the Check your tires once a month or more.
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation tire. See Spare Tire on page 5-99 for additional
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum information.
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity. How to Check
For additional information regarding how much Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
of the Tire and Loading Information label, inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34. How you may look properly inflated even when they are
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
weight than it was designed to carry. has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

5-65
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. High-Speed Operation
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information {CAUTION:
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
recommended amount. higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on Sustained high-speed driving causes
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
and moisture. high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.

5-66
If your vehicle has P255/50R20 104V size tires installed Tire Pressure Monitor System
on the rear axle, they will require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds above The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
99 mph (160 km/h). Set the cold inflation pressure, for and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
the rear tires only, to the maximum inflation pressure TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (262 kPa), whichever tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
is lower. See the example following. When you end this located in the vehicle.
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold tire inflation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
Example: on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum pressure label, you should determine the proper
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press. tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
high-speed driving at 38 psi (262 kPa). equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
The inflation pressure for the front tires should be set to more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
Racing or other competitive driving may affect the soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
warranty coverage of your vehicle. See your warranty pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
booklet for more information. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

5-67
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper Federal Communications
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has Commission (FCC) and Industry
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS and Science Canada
low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is two conditions:
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
approximately one minute and then remain continuously 2. This device must accept any interference received,
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon including interference that may cause undesired
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction operation.
exists.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur the following two conditions:
for a variety of reasons, including the installation 1. This device may not cause interference.
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always 2. This device must accept any interference received,
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one including interference that may cause undesired
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the operation of the device.
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the Changes or modifications to this system by other than
TPMS to continue to function properly. an authorized service facility could void authorization to
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-69, for use this equipment.
additional information.

5-68
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed (DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure viewed by the driver. For additional information and
in the vehicle’s tires and transmit the tire pressure details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. Operation and Displays on page 3-50 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-53.
The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a low tire
pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has the Driver The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
Information Center (DIC) steering wheel control weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
buttons, tire pressure levels may also be checked turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
through the DIC. See “Tire Pressures” under DIC indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) is low
Operation and Displays on page 3-50. and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
When a low tire pressure
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
condition is detected, the
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
TPMS illuminates the
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
low tire pressure warning
Your Vehicle on page 4-34, for an example of the Tire
light located on the
and Loading Information label and its location on
instrument panel cluster.
your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-64.

5-69
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire • The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire not completed or not completed successfully after
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
page 5-72 and Tires on page 5-57. TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire sensor matching process is performed successfully.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not section.
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire • One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
sealants. damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light • Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message and wheels other than those recommended for your
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-74.
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come • Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
on are: using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
message should go off once you re-install the road the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message come on
tire containing the TPMS sensor. and stay on.

5-70
TPMS Sensor Matching Process The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:

Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. 1. Set the parking brake.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will engine off.
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The 3. Turn the headlamp control from off to parking lamps
sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the four times within three seconds. A double horn chirp
following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front will sound and the TPMS low tire warning light will
tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire begin to flash. The double horn chirp and flashing
using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for TPMS warning light indicate that the TPMS matching
service. process has started. The TPMS warning light should
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each continue flashing throughout the matching
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s procedure.
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not 4. Start with the driver side front tire.
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire’s sidewall. 5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure then stop and listen for a single horn chirp. The
gage, or a key. single horn chirp should sound within 15 seconds,
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel confirming that the sensor identification code has
position, and five minutes overall to match all four been matched to this tire and wheel position. If you
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to do not hear the confirming single horn chirp, you will
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes need to start over with step number one.
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over. 6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.

5-71
 8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
procedure in Step 5. tires as soon as possible and check wheel
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
driver’s side rear tire, check to see if the TPMS See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-73
warning light is still flashing. If yes, turn the ignition and Wheel Replacement on page 5-78.
switch to LOCK/OFF to exit the sensor matching
process. If the TPMS warning light is not flashing,
the five minute time limit has passed and you will
need to start the process over beginning with Step 1.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems

Tire Inspection and Rotation

We recommend that you regularly inspect your When rotating your tires, always use the correct
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of rotation pattern shown here.
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-73 for more information. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown on
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles the Tire and Loading Information label. See
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64 and
on page 6-4. Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.

5-72
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire When It Is Time for New Tires
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-69.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
influence when you need new tires.
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-120.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
{CAUTION: check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to when your tires have only
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
become loose after time. The wheel could of tread remaining. Some
come off and cause an accident. When commercial truck tires may
you change a wheel, remove any rust or not have treadwear
dirt from places where the wheel attaches indicators.
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-82.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,

pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-96.

5-73
You need new tires if any of the following statements Buying New Tires
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places GM has developed and matched specific tires for
around the tire. your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
tire’s rubber. Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
deep enough to show cord or fabric. you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. designed to give the same performance and vehicle
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
cannot be repaired well because of the size or GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
location of the damage. a dozen critical specifications that impact the
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are overall performance of your vehicle, including
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if brake system performance, ride and handling,
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about spec number will be followed by a MS, for mud and
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-58 for
the tire manufacturer for more information. additional information.

5-74
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did {CAUTION:
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a full
set of tires can affect the braking and handling If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection the wheel rim flanges could develop
and Rotation on page 5-72 for information on cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
proper tire rotation. and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a
crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
Mixing tires could cause you to lose that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
control while driving. If you mix tires of they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not as your vehicle’s original tires.
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage to
your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.

5-75
Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installed {CAUTION:
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
than the proper warning level you would get with may not provide an acceptable level of
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor performance and safety if tires not
System on page 5-67. recommended for those wheels are selected.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed You may increase the chance that you will
on the Tire and Loading Information Label. See crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34, for more specific wheel and tire systems developed for
information about the Tire and Loading Information your vehicle, and have them properly installed
Label and its location on your vehicle. by a GM certified technician.

Different Size Tires and Wheels See Buying New Tires on page 5-74 and Accessories
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.

5-76
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
maximum section width. For example: under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
The following information relates to the system graded 100. The relative performance of tires
developed by the United States National Highway depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which however, and may depart significantly from the
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and norm due to variations in driving habits, service
temperature performance. This applies only to practices, and differences in road characteristics
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are and climate.
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) Traction – AA, A, B, C
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
limited-production tires. controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
While the tires available on General Motors may have poor traction performance.
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
to federal safety requirements and additional tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) tests, and does not include acceleration,
standards. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.

5-77
Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat the longest tire life and best overall performance.
when tested under controlled conditions on a Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you
high temperature can cause the material of the tire notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive side or the other, the alignment might need to be
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
grade C corresponds to a level of performance on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
which all passenger car tires must meet under the rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel Wheel Replacement
than the minimum required by law.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
is established for a tire that is properly inflated wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
underinflation, or excessive loading, either wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
separately or in combination, can cause heat dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
buildup and possible tire failure. Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.

5-78
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
the same way as the one it replaces. odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
clearance to the body and chassis.
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-82 for more
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the information.
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle. Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
dangerous. It could affect the braking and used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
air and make you lose control. You could have replace a wheel, use a new GM original
a collision in which you or others could be equipment wheel.
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.

5-79
Tire Chains Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator system.
You can inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires.
{CAUTION: You can also use it to bring your tire pressure up to
the proper pressure. It is not designed to inflate large
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough objects which will require more than five minutes to
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle inflate, such as an air mattress.
without the proper amount of clearance can The accessory inflator is
cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or located in the rear
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the compartment on the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of driver’s side of the vehicle
your vehicle and you or others may be injured in behind an access cover,
a crash. Use another type of traction device only near the liftgate opening.
if its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the To remove the cover, push in on the tab to access the
rear tires. inflator.
You may have an air inflator kit that is located in the
glove compartment. It includes a 22 ft (6.7 m) hose with
three nozzle adapters.

5-80
To use the accessory inflator: Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and store it in
1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of its proper location. Remove the inflator hose from
the hose, if required. the outlet during loading and unloading. Load leveling
will not function with the inflator hose attached to
the inflator outlet. See Electronically Controlled Air
{CAUTION: Suspension System on page 4-44 for more information.
To reinstall the cover, line up the tabs at the back of
Inflating something too much can make it the cover, put it in place and latch the tabs.
explode, and you or others could be injured. A continuous flashing indicator light may also indicate a
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and malfunction in the air suspension system. See
inflate any object only to its recommended Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System on
pressure. page 4-44 for more information.

2. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish If a Tire Goes Flat
to inflate.
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
3. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
4. Press and release the switch to turn the air inflator If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
on. The indicator light will remain on when the slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
inflator is running. are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
The system has an internal clock to prevent the
system from overheating. The system will allow If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
about five minutes of running time, then the the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
compressor will stop. The indicator light will then accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
begin to flash. When the indicator is off, the inflator Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
can be started again by pressing the switch. If the to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
compressor is still hot, it may only run for a short time
before shutting off again.
5. Press and release the switch to turn the inflator off.
5-81
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a Changing a Flat Tire
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently page 3-6 for more information.
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without or other people. You and they could be badly
the appropriate safety equipment and training. injured or even killed. Find a level place to
The jack provided with your vehicle is change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is from moving:
used for anything else, you or others could be
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the
jack. Use the jack provided with your vehicle 2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
only for changing a flat tire. CAUTION: (Continued)

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-82
 When your vehicle has a flat tire, use this as a guide to
CAUTION: (Continued) assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.

3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be

sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.

5-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A),
wheel blocks (B), extension(s) (socket end) (C),
handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E).
To remove the underbody-mounted spare from your
vehicle:
The jacking equipment needed to remove the spare tire
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to the
is stored under the rear seat. To release the jack from
storage position under the vehicle while it is
its holder, turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to
supported by a jack, you could damage the tire
lower the jack head. See Rear Seat Operation on
and/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a tire
page 1-11 for more information.
when the vehicle is on the ground.

5-84
 A. Wheel Wrench 3. Insert the socket end
B. Hoist Shaft of the extension (C) on
a 45 degree angle
C. Extension downward into the hoist
D. Retainer drive shaft hole.
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Up)

It is exposed when the rear gate is open and is just

above the rear bumper. Be sure the socket end
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass on of the extension (C) connects to the hoist shaft.
page 2-12 for more information.
2. Attach the wheel wrench (A) to the extension (C).

5-85
 4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower 5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when the
the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until tire has been completely lowered, and pull it
the spare tire can be pulled out from under through the wheel opening.
the vehicle. 6. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 5-92 you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
for more information. this cable before driving your vehicle.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

5-86
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-82 for more information.
2. Use the flat end of the wheel wrench to carefully
pry off the center cap.

3. Using the wheel

wrench, loosen all the
wheel nuts by turning
the nuts one turn Front Position Rear Position
counterclockwise.
A. Front Frame/Rear Axle D. Extension(s)
Do not remove
them yet. B. Jack E. Wheel Wrench
C. Handle
6. Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest
the flat tire.

4. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to

raise the jack lift head.
5. Place the handle, extension, and wheel wrench
onto the jack.

5-87
 {CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.

{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly 7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
positioned can damage the vehicle and even clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal ground so there is enough room for the spare
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the tire to fit.
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.

5-88
 8. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire. CAUTION: (Continued)

where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an

emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper
or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-82.

9. Remove any rust or dirt

from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
CAUTION: (Continued)

5-89
10. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.

11. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure the cone

shaped end is toward the wheel.
12. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut cannot be turned by hand,
use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon
as possible. 13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-90
 Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
{CAUTION: expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose page 5-120 for the wheel nut torque specification.
and even come off. This could lead to an 14. Use the wrench to
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. tighten the wheel nuts
If you have to replace them, be sure to get firmly in a crisscross
new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop sequence as shown.
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-120 for wheel nut
torque specification.

5-91
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist {CAUTION:
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off Someone standing too close during the
your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is procedure could be injured by the jack.
damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
be stored with the valve stem pointing up. See Storing a
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-96 for instructions
on storing the spare or flat tire correctly. on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the under spare.

{CAUTION: To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:

1. Check under the

Before beginning this procedure read all the
vehicle to see if the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the cable is visible. If it is
instructions could damage the hoist assembly not visible, proceed
and you and others could get hurt. Read and to Step 6.
follow the instructions listed next.

5-92
2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or
feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 2 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on
page 5-84.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.

6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the wheel

wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle
towards the front of the rear bumper. Position
the center lift point of the jack under the center of
the spare tire.

5-93
 7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it 11. If the spare tire is
lifts the end fitting. hanging from the
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops cable, insert the socket
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The end of the extension
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is into the hoist shaft hole
balancing on the jack. on a 45 degree
angle downward.
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
12. Be sure that the socket end of the extension
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
connects to the hoist shaft.
from under the spare tire with the other hand.

5-94
 13. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
14. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist
assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.

Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower

the spare the rest of the way.

5-95
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools {CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to
{CAUTION: be stored with the valve stem pointing up.
If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the pointing downward, its secondary latch will not
passenger compartment of the vehicle could work properly and the spare tire could loosen
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
loose equipment could strike someone. happened when your vehicle was being
Store all these in the proper place. driven, the tire might contact a person or
another vehicle, causing injury and, of
course, damage to itself as well. Be sure
the underbody-mounted spare tire is stored
with its valve stem pointing up.

Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should

always be stored under the vehicle with the
hoist. However, storing it that way for an extended
period could damage the wheel. To avoid this,
always stow the wheel properly with the valve stem
pointing up and have the wheel repaired as soon
as possible.

5-96
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted flat 3. Make sure the valve stem is pointed up and to
or spare tire. the rear.
A. Wheel Wrench 4. Pull the retainer (D) through the wheel.
B. Hoist Shaft 5. Put the socket end of the extension (C) through the
C. Extension hole just above the rear bumper at a 45 degree
D. Retainer angle downward. Connect the socket end of the
extension to the hoist shaft (B).
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem 6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
Pointed Up) vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench (A)
clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it
skip twice. This indicates that the tire is secure and
the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be
overtightened.

1. Put the tire (E) on the ground at the rear of the

vehicle.
2. Remove the hubcap, if the vehicle has one, from
the flat tire by tapping the backside of the hubcap
with the wheel wrench (A). Store in a safe location
until the flat tire is repaired. Once the tire is
repaired, replace the hubcap.

5-97
 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), A. Handle D. Extension(s)
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, B. Wheel Wrench E. Knob
use the wheel wrench and socket end of the C. Instruction Label F. Wheel Blocks
extension to tighten the cable. and Jack
8. Return the equipment to the proper location in the
vehicle as shown next.

5-98
 1. Attach the handle (A), wheel wrench (B), and After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
extension (D) in the slots provided. stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
2. Roll up the instruction label (C) and return to the correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
slot in the tool kit. at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (F) to the jack.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
4. Turn the knob (E) on the jack clockwise to raise the as soon as you can and installed back onto your
jack head. vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be available in case
5. Return the rear seat to its proper position. you need it again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different
sizes, because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and
its wheel together.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-64 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-87 and Storing a Flat
or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-96.

5-99
Appearance Care Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
Interior Cleaning defogger. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening your
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
vehicle’s doors and windows.
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains using a small brush with soft bristles.
to set rapidly. Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

5-100
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners Fabric/Carpet
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
remove a soil from any interior surface. frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils,
your vehicle’s interior surfaces. always try to remove them first with plain water or club
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure as possible using one of the following techniques:
can damage your interior and does not improve the • For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
effectiveness of soil removal. towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry until no more can be removed.
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. • For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
Using too much soap will leave a residue that then vacuum.
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
To clean, use the following instructions:
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide. 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning. 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha, toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
alcohol, etc. area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.

5-101
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small Plastic Surfaces
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
result, clean the entire surface. remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
fabric or carpet. commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
Leather permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, to clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use manner.
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
to preserve and protect leather may permanently difficult to see through the windshield under certain
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are conditions.
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

5-102
Care of Safety Belts Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry. The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that
{CAUTION: can damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they it on your vehicle or damage may occur and it would
might not be able to provide adequate not be covered by the warranty.
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
soap and lukewarm water. washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
Weatherstrips from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-107. Follow all manufacturers’
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, vehicle care product.
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

5-103
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
page 5-103. safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
Finish Care and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the whenever possible.
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Materials on page 5-107.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish. Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.

5-104
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
Blades thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
glass cleaner. Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
chrome wheels only.
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
damaged. cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
Wipers can be damaged by: them because the surface could be damaged.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
• Heat and sun cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
• Snow and ice, without proper removal or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
Aluminum Wheels equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, carbide tire cleaning brushes.
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.

5-105
Tires Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
products on your vehicle may damage the paint underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
always wipe off any overspray from all painted protection.
surfaces on your vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
Sheet Metal Damage and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or do this for you.
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the Chemical Paint Spotting
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
Finish Damage attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
expense. repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger whichever occurs first.
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

5-106
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Description Usage Swirl Remover Polish scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior
polishing cloth. Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Tar and Road Oil Removes tar, road oil,
Remover and asphalt. Cleans, shines, and
Foaming Tire Shine Low protects tires. No wiping
Chrome Cleaner and Use on chrome or Gloss
necessary.
Polish stainless steel.
Medium foaming
Removes soil and black shampoo. Cleans and
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner marks from whitewalls Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes.
and raised white lettering. Biodegradable and
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl. phosphate free.
Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, Quickly removes spots
smoke and fingerprints. and stains from carpets,
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime vinyl, and cloth
Chrome Wheel Cleaner upholstery.
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust, Odorless spray odor
fingerprints, and surface Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics,
Finish Enhancer vinyl, leather and carpet.
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.

5-107
Vehicle Identification Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-120 for your vehicle’s
engine code.

Service Parts Identification Label

This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label has the
following information:

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on • Model designation
the driver side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also • Paint information
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels • Production options and special equipment
and the certificates of title and registration.
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

5-108
Electrical System Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
Add-On Electrical Equipment breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer have it fixed.
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by Power Windows and Other Power
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should. Options
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
if your vehicle is not operating. windows and other power accessories. When the current
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66. goes away.

Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by four fuses. An
electrical overload will cause a lamp to go on and off.
If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.

5-109
Fuses and Circuit Breakers Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
The fuse block is located under the hood in the engine
compartment on the driver side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Remove the primary cover by pressing the two locking
tabs. Remove the secondary cover by snapping off
while lifting. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, reverse
the sequence.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.

5-110
 L6 Engine

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

1 Electrically-Controlled Air 3 Passenger Side Low-Beam

Suspension Headlamp

2 Passenger Side High-Beam 4 Back-Up Trailer Lamps

Headlamp

5-111
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
5 Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp 23 Electronic Throttle Control
6 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp 24 Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver
Information Center
7 Windshield Wiper
Automatic Shift Lock Control
8 Active Transfer Case 25 System
9 Windshield Washer Transmission Control Module
26
10 Powertrain Control Module B Canister
11 Fog Lamps 27 Backup
12 Stoplamp 28 Powertrain Control Module 1
13 Cigarette Lighter 29 Oxygen Sensor
15 Electric Adjustable Pedals 30 Air Conditioning
16 Truck Body Controller, Ignition 1 31 Truck Body Controller 1
17 Crank 32 Trailer
18 Airbag 33 Antilock Brakes (ABS)
19 Trailer Electric Brake 34 Ignition A
20 Cooling Fan 35 Blower Motor
21 Horn 36 Blower
22 Ignition E 50 Passenger Side Trailer Turn

5-112
 Fuses Usage Relays Usage
51 Driver Side Trailer Turn 41 Fuel Pump
52 Hazard Flashers 42 Windshield Washer
53 Headlamp Driver Module
43 High-Beam Headlamp
54 Air Injection Reactor (AIR)
Solenoid 44 Air Conditioning
56 Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Pump 45 Cooling Fan
Vehicle Stability Enhancement 46 Headlamp Driver Module
58 System (StabiliTrak®)
59 Regulated Voltage Control 47 Starter
49 Electric Adjustable Pedal
Relays Usage 55 Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
37 Headlamp Wiper 57 Powertrain
38 Rear Window Wiper/Washer
39 Fog Lamps Miscellaneous Usage

40 Horn 48 Instrument Panel Battery

5-113
 V8 Engine

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

1 Electrically-Controlled Air 3 Passenger Side Low-Beam

Suspension Headlamp

2 Passenger Side High-Beam 4 Back-Up Trailer Lamps

Headlamp

5-114
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
5 Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp 24 Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver
Information Center
6 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Automatic Shift Lock Control
7 Windshield Wiper 25 System
8 Active Transfer Case 26 Engine 1
9 Windshield Washer 27 Backup
10 Powertrain Control Module B 28 Powertrain Control Module 1
11 Fog Lamps 29 Powertrain Control Module
12 Stoplamp 30 Air Conditioning
13 Cigarette Lighter 31 Injector Bank A
14 Ignition Coils 32 Trailer
15 Transmission Control Module 33 Antilock Brakes (ABS)
(TCM) Canister Vent
34 Ignition A
16 Truck Body Controller, Ignition 1
35 Blower Motor
17 Crank
36 Ignition B
18 Airbag
50 Passenger Side Trailer Turn
19 Trailer Electric Brake
51 Driver Side Trailer Turn
20 Cooling Fan
52 Hazard Flashers
21 Horn
53 Transmission
22 Ignition E
54 Oxygen Sensor Bank B
23 Electronic Throttle Control
55 Oxygen Sensor Bank A

5-115
 Fuses Usage Relays Usage
56 Injector Bank B 47 Starter
57 Headlamp Driver Module 49 Electric Adjustable Pedal
58 Truck Body Controller 1 60 Powertrain
59 Electric Adjustable Pedal
Vehicle Stability Enhancement Miscellaneous Usage
61
System (StabiliTrak®) 48 Instrument Panel Battery
62 Regulated Voltage Control
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
Relays Usage
37 Headlamp Wiper
38 Rear Window Wiper/Washer
39 Fog Lamps
40 Horn
41 Fuel Pump
42 Windshield Washer
43 High-Beam Headlamp
44 Air Conditioning
45 Cooling Fan
46 Headlamp Driver Module

5-116
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
01 Passenger Door Control Module 05 Rear Fog Lamps
02 Driver Door Control Module 06 Blank
03 Liftgate Module 2 07 Truck Body Controller 2
04 Truck Body Controller 3 08 Power Seats

5-117
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
09 Rear Wiper 21 Lock
10 Driver Door Module 23 Blank
11 Amplifier 24 Unlock
12 Passenger Door Module 25 Blank
13 Rear Climate Controls 26 Blank
14 Driver Side Rear Parking Lamps 27 OnStar® Overhead
Battery/OnStar® System
15 Blank
28 Sunroof
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
16
Stoplamp (CHMSL) 29 Not Used
Passenger Side Rear Parking 30 Parking Lamps
17
Lamps
31 Truck Body Controller Accessory
18 Locks
32 Truck Body Controller 5
19 Liftgate Module/Driver Seat
Module 33 Front Wipers

20 Blank 34 Vehicle Stop

5-118
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
35 Transmission Control Module 43 Passenger Side Turn Signal

36 Heat Ventilation Air 44 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning

Conditioning B
45 Rear Fog Lamps
37 Front Parking Lamps
46 Auxiliary Power 1
38 Driver Side Turn Signal
47 Ignition 0
Heat Ventilation Air
39 Conditioning 1 48 Four-Wheel Drive
40 Truck Body Controller 4 49 Blank
41 Radio 50 Truck Body Controller Ignition
42 Trailer Park 51 Brakes
52 Truck Body Controller Run

5-119
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Capacities
Application
English Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
4.2L L6 9.7 qt 9.2 L
5.3L V8 11.2 qt 10.6 L
Engine Oil with Filter
4.2L L6 7.0 qt 6.6 L
5.3L V8 6.0 qt 5.7 L

5-120
 Capacities
Application
English Metric
Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 L
Transfer Case Lubricant 2.0 qt 1.8 L
Transmission (Drain and Refill) 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
4.2L L6 S Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 M Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

5-121
✍ NOTES

5-122
 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
Introduction ...................................................6-2 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-14
Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7 Maintenance Record .....................................6-16

6-1
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
Introduction replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
change as recommended. condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
dealer/retailer for details. to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.

6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
{CAUTION:
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
Because of all the different ways people use their be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
can be seriously injured. Do your own
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any maintenance work only if you have the
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, required know-how and the proper tools and
see your dealer/retailer. equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
This schedule is for vehicles that:
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended Service Work on page 5-4.
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34. Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal necessary equipment, you should have your
driving limits. dealer/retailer do these jobs.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-13.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-6.

6-3
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at
needs, you will know that trained and supported service least once a year and at this time the system must
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts. be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
parts and reset the system.
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to System on page 5-19 for information on the Engine Oil
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Life System and resetting the system.
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
When the change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE
on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
OIL DIC message appears, certain services, checks,
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
and inspections are required. Required services
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that your
parts from your dealer/retailer.
first service be Maintenance I, your second service be
Maintenance II, and that you alternate Maintenance I
Scheduled Maintenance and Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
When the change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE
OIL DIC message comes on, it means that service is Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the light or
required for your vehicle. See Change Engine Oil Light message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle
on page 3-45 or DIC Warnings and Messages on was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
page 3-53. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
is possible that, if you are driving under the best Maintenance II whenever the light or message comes
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate on 10 months or more since the last service or if the light
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year. or message has not come on at all for one year.

6-4
 Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission Control • •
Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. See footnote (k).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-72 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on • •
page 6-9.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
• •
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
• •
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. See footnote (g). •

6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
• • • • • •
or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
• • •
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service). • • •
See footnotes (g) and (h).
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (normal service). •
See footnote (g).
Automatic transfer case only: Change
• • •
transfer case fluid. See footnote (g).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
•
Control Service.
V8 engine only: Inspect spark plug
•
wires. An Emission Control Service.

6-6
 Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
•
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. •
See footnote (l).

Maintenance Footnotes (c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
parking brake, etc. recommended at least once a year.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and (d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-54 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades on page 5-105 for more information.

6-7
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety (h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you conditions:
see anything that might keep a safety belt system − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 1-68. − In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, − Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot service.
points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate (i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
door hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-26
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them the cooling system and pressure cap.
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
(g) Inspect hoses for cracks, chafing, leaks, kinks, and problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
proper installation. the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

6-8
Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
dependability, and emission control performance of your on page 5-26.
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
checks and services.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your necessary.
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
each fuel fill. inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Engine Oil Level Check page 5-64. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-82.
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
Tire Wear Inspection
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty. Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-72.

6-9
At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
around the vehicle. surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-33. on page 2-33.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
turn off the engine immediately if it starts. the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). but do not start the engine. Without applying the
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
your dealer/retailer for service. of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.

6-10
Ignition Transmission Lock Check Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn parking brake.
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only the engine running and the transmission in
when the shift lever is in PARK (P). NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
• The ignition key should come out only in the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
LOCK/OFF. held by the parking brake only.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. • To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Parking Brake and Automatic Then release the parking brake followed by the
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

{CAUTION: Underbody Flushing Service

At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
When you are doing this check, your vehicle corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
could begin to move. You or others could be clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
injured and property could be damaged. Make can collect.
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.

6-11
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Parking Brake Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part Cable Guides meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
number, or specification can be obtained from your
Category LB or GC-LB.
dealer/retailer.
Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Usage Fluid/Lubricant System Canada 89021186).
Engine oil which meets Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic
GM Standard GM6094M and Transmission Transmission Fluid.
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Engine Oil Engines starburst symbol. To (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
determine the proper viscosity for Canada 10953474).
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Chassis Lubricant
Oil on page 5-16. (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Chassis
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Canada 88901242) or lubricant
®
Lubrication meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL Category LB or GC-LB.
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-26. SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or Front and Rear Axle Lubricant
System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
Axle in Canada 89021678) meeting
Windshield Optikleen® Washer Solvent. GM Specification 9986115.
Washer

6-12
 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid Hood and Door
Transfer Case (GM Part No. U.S. 12378508, in Hinges, Body
Canada 10953626). Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Rear Driveline (GM PartLubricant
Chassis
No. U.S. 12377985, in Hinge and (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Center Spline Linkage, Canada 10953474).
and Universal Canada 88901242) or lubricant Folding Seats,
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Joints Category LB or GC-LB. and Fuel
Door Hinge
Chassis Lubricant
Constant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Outer Tailgate
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Velocity Canada 88901242) or lubricant Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Universal Joint meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Points and
Canada 10953474).
Category LB or GC-LB. Hinges
Hood Latch Weatherstrip Lubricant
Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2, (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Anchor, and Category LB or GC-LB. Canada 992887).
Release Pawl Synthetic Grease with
Weatherstrip Teflon, Superlube
Squeaks (GM Part No. U.S. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).

6-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24208576 TF337
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15036141 A2014C
Engine Oil Filter
4.2L L6 Engine 89017342 PF61
5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
4.2L L6 Engine 12598004 41-103
5.3L V8 Engine 12571164 41-985
Wiper Blades
Front – 22 inches (56 cm) 15214346 —
Rear – 16 inches (41 cm) 15160740 —

6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing

5.3L V8 Engine

4.2L V6 Engine

6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-16
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-17
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-18
 Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5 United States Government ..........................7-15
Customer Assistance for Reporting Safety Defects to the
Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................7-6 Canadian Government ................................7-16
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-16
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7 Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-8 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-18
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10 Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18
Courtesy Transportation .................................7-11 OnStar® ......................................................7-19
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12 Navigation System ........................................7-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-19

7-1
Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
Information resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by
calling 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Customer Satisfaction Procedure Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication by calling
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best the following information available to give the Customer
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can Assistance Representative:
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: available from the vehicle registration or title,
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
dealership management. Normally, concerns can and visible through the windshield.
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has • Dealership name and location.
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
the general manager. When contacting GMC, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.

7-2
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if address:
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the BBB Auto Line Program
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line 4200 Wilson Boulevard
Program to enforce your rights. Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or This program is available in all 50 states and the
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
Although you may be required to resort to this informal mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
dispute resolution program prior to filling out a court the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
action, use of the program is free of charge and your case discontinue its participation in this program.
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

7-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that For further information concerning eligibility in the
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you can call the
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has write to:
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes Mediation/Arbitration Program
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The c/o Customer Communication Centre
program provides for the review of the facts involved General Motors of Canada Limited
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an Mail Code: CA1-163-005
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
should be completed in approximately 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, Identification Number (VIN).
and free
of charge.

7-4
Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
(United States only) gmcanada.com where you can save information on
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in tools and forms with greater ease.
one place. Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
The Online Owner Center allows you to: will have access to:
• Get e-mail service reminders. − My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Access information about your specific vehicle, − My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
including tips and videos and an electronic address and phone number for each of your
version of this owner manual. preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and − My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
maintenance schedule. helpful advice on owning and maintaining
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide. your vehicle.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only − My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
available to members.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
section within www.gmcanada.com.
information and to register your vehicle.

7-5
Customer Assistance for Text From Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9992 (English)
Telephone (TTY) Users 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use the Text Telephones U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583 Canada
(462-8583). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.) General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Customer Assistance Offices Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number www.gmcanada.com
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to 1-800-263-3777 (English)
write or e-mail GMC, the letter should be addressed to: 1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
United States Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.GMC.com
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583) (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022

7-6
All Overseas Locations GM Mobility Reimbursement
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. Program
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000 This program, available to qualified applicants, can
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.

7-7
Roadside Assistance Program • Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be
covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
For vehicles purchased in the U.S. call, entry into your vehicle. A remote unlock may
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782); be available if you have an active OnStar®
(Text telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438). subscription. To ensure security, the driver must
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800. present personal identification before lock-out
service is provided. In Canada, the vehicle
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. registration is also required.
As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you are • Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
automatically enrolled in the GMC Roadside Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
Assistance program. service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Who is Covered? Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
driving the vehicle without the consent of the owner
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
is not eligible for coverage.
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
Services Provided by a warrantable failure.
The following services are provided in the U.S. and • Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), charge if the vehicle does not start.
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will
not be provided through this service.
7-8
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Roadside Original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair
Assistance will send you detailed, computer order are required. In Canada, pre-authorization is
personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either also required.
the most direct route or the most scenic route to your Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
destination, anywhere in North America, along with help you make any necessary arrangements and
helpful travel information pertaining to your trip. explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
Please allow three weeks before your planned assistance.
departure date. In Canada, trip routing requests will • Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
be limited to six per calendar year. times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: In the timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
event of a warranty related vehicle disablement, secure local emergency road service, and you will be
while en route and over 150 miles (250 kilometres) reimbursed up to $100 (Canadian) upon submission
from original point of departure, you may qualify for of the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
trip interruption expense assistance. This assistance In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
covers reasonable reimbursement of up to a However, when other services are utilized, our
maximum of $500. In Canada, maximums include: Roadside Assistance Representatives will explain any
(A) meals (maximum of $50/day), (B) lodging payment obligations you might incur.
(maximum of $100/night) and (C) alternate ground
transportation (maximum of $40/day). This benefit is GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
to assist you with some of the unplanned expense the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner
you may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
repaired. become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

7-9
Calling For Assistance Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Representative: Roadside Assistance program at any time without
• Your name, home address, and home telephone notification.
number
• Telephone number of your location Scheduling Service Appointments
• Location of the vehicle. When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
vehicle By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
• Description of the problem department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
Towing and Road Service Exclusions safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance let them know this, and ask for instructions.
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting
or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction
devices.

7-10
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our Warranty service can generally be completed while you
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty your dealer can offer you one of the following:
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Shuttle Service
Several courtesy transportation options are available to Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
repairs are required. shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information. Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
7-11
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
and must be supported by original receipts. This resale value, and safety performance can be
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement compromised in subsequent collisions.
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may Collision Parts
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, same materials and construction methods as the parts
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
beyond the completion of the repair. Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
courtesy rental. maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Additional Program Information Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
Transportation arrangements will be administered may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
by appropriate dealer personnel. originally designed appearance and safety performance,
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, however, the history of these parts is not known.
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
pursuant to the terms and conditions described covered by that warranty.
herein at its sole discretion.

7-12
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
made by companies other than GM and may not have assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, not available from your current insurance carrier,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
to such parts are not covered by that warranty. Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
Repair Facility parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a If a Crash Occurs
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians • Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
and comparable equipment. all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
Insuring Your Vehicle is injured.
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with • If there has been an injury, call emergency services
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
are significant differences in the quality of coverage matters have been taken care of. Move your
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.

7-13
 • Give only the necessary and requested information • If possible, call your insurance company from the
to police and other parties involved in the crash. scene of the crash. They will walk you through
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental the information they will need. If they ask for
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. a police report, phone or go to the police
This will help guard against post-crash legal action. department headquarters the next day and you
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.
In some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
page 7-8 for more information.
especially true if there are no injuries and both
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the vehicles are driveable.
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from • Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is make sure you are comfortable with them.
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
information and registration if you keep these with their work for a long time.
items in your vehicle. • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
• Gather the important information you will need from make sure you understand what work will be
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle this opportunity.
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.

7-14
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Reporting Safety Defects
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, Reporting Safety Defects to the
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
United States Government
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
Specify to the facility that any required replacement could cause a crash or could cause injury or
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new death, you should immediately inform the National
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your in addition to notifying General Motors.
GM vehicle warranty.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
insurance company may initially value the repair using and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair become involved in individual problems between
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost. Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision Administrator, NHTSA
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with 400 Seventh Street, SW.
that company. In such cases, you can have control of Washington D.C., 20590
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within You can also obtain other information about motor
reasonable limits. vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
Canadian Government General Motors of Canada Limited
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada Service Publications Ordering
Road Safety Branch Information
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
General Motors brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in Service Bulletins
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
Call 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782), or write: information needed to knowledgeably service
GMC Customer Assistance Center General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
P.O. Box 33172 instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
Detroit, MI 48232-5172 your vehicle.

7-16
Owner Information ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
and intended to provide basic operational information Eastern Time
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the For Credit Card Orders Only
Maintenance Schedule for all models. (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Warranty Booklet. Or you can write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee Helm, Incorporated
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only. P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
Current and Past Model Order Forms incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
an order form, specify year and model name of checks payable in U.S. funds.
the vehicle.

7-17
Vehicle Data Recording and Event Data Recorders
Privacy This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
computers that record information about the vehicle’s or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
performance and how it is driven. For example, understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide is designed to record such data as:
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your • How various systems in your vehicle were operating
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
modules may also store data about how you operate the belts were buckled/fastened
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s • How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat accelerator and/or brake pedal
positions, and temperature settings. • How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

7-18
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is Navigation System
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special system may result in the storage of destinations,
equipment, can read the information if they have addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
access to the vehicle or the EDR. information. Refer to the navigation system operating
GM will not access this data or share it with others manual for information on stored data and for deletion
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the instructions.
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar Radio Frequency
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by Identification (RFID)
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
for GM research needs or may be made available to
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
vehicle owner.
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
OnStar® or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-48 in this
manual for more information.

7-19
✍ NOTES

7-20
 A Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ........................................ 3-103
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-40 Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-39
Adding Equipment to Your Appearance Care
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................... 1-66 Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-105
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7 Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-103
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-109 Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-106
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-24 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-104
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21 Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-101
Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-21, 3-23 Finish Care ............................................... 5-104
Airbag Finish Damage .......................................... 5-106
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-34 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-33 Other Plastic Surfaces ............................. 5-102
Airbag System ................................................ 1-53 Interior Cleaning ........................................ 5-100
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60 Leather .................................................... 5-102
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-58 Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-106
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-56 Tires ........................................................ 5-106
Airbag Systems Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-106
Adding Equipment to Your Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-107
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-66 Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-103
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-59 Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-103
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-61 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-105
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-66 Appointments, Scheduling Service ..................... 7-10
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-59 Ashtray ......................................................... 3-20
Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-103

1
Audio System ................................................. 3-65 Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-49
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-101 Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-53
Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-103 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-103 Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-51
Navigation/Radio System, Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-87 Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-49
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-102 Headlamps ................................................. 5-50
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-100 License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-53
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-66 Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-54
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-101 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............ 5-51
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-103 Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-74
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-66
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-23
C
Calibration ..................................... 2-39, 2-41, 2-44
Operation ................................................... 2-26
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
B Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Battery .......................................................... 5-41 Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-120
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-18 Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-12, 2-37, 4-30, 4-45
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19 Care of
Brake Safety Belts .............................................. 5-103
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5 Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-59
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38 Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-60
System Warning Light .................................. 3-38 CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-82
Braking ........................................................... 4-3 Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-57
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5 Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-80
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-20 Charging System Light .................................... 3-36

2
Check Cleaning (cont.)
Engine Light ............................................... 3-41 Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-106
Gages Warning Light ................................... 3-47 Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-103
Check Gas Cap Light ...................................... 3-49 Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-103
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-105
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-106 Climate Control System
Child Restraints Dual .......................................................... 3-21
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-38 Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-23
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-35 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-28
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-41 Rear .......................................................... 3-28
Older Children ............................................. 1-32 Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-66
Securing a Child Restraint in a Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 1-47 Compass ....................................... 2-39, 2-41, 2-44
Securing a Child Restraint in the Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-16
Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 1-49 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Securing a Child Restraint in the Convenience Net ............................................ 2-59
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-50 Coolant
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40 Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-40
Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-103 Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-24
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-20 Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Cleaning Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 5-105 Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-46
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-104 Customer Assistance Information
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-101 Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-11
Finish Care ............................................... 5-104 Customer Assistance for
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................ 7-6
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-102 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6
Interior ..................................................... 5-100 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
Leather .................................................... 5-102 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-7
Tires ........................................................ 5-106 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-16

3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.) Door (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to the Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9
Canadian Government .............................. 7-16 Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-49
United States Government ......................... 7-15 DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-50
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-8 DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-58
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-53
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-26
D Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-28
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-28
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-8
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-29
Diesel
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-27
Running Out of Fuel .................................... 2-38
Off-Road .................................................... 4-13
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-82
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-34
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Winter ........................................................ 4-30
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-17
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-23
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-17
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-21
Door
DVD
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-8
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-87
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8

4
 E Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-31
EDR ............................................................. 7-18
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-109
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-110
F
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-110 Filter
Headlamps ............................................... 5-109 Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-109 Finish Damage ............................................. 5-106
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-116 Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-103
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-109 Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System ... 4-44 Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Engine Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-81
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21 Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-82
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-45 Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-96
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-41 Fluid ............................................................. 5-23
Coolant ...................................................... 5-26 Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-24 Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-40 Fog Lamp
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15 Fog ........................................................... 3-16
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12 Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-29, 5-47
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-37 Front Axle ...................................................... 5-48
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-35 Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Oil ............................................................. 5-16 Additives ...................................................... 5-7
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-19 California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Overheating ................................................ 5-28 Check Gas Cap Light ................................... 3-49
Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-46 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Starting ...................................................... 2-22 Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18 Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-18 Gage ......................................................... 3-48

5
Fuel (cont.)
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-6 H
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6 Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-49 Head Restraints .............................................. 1-10
Running Out of ........................................... 2-38 Headlamp
Fuses Aiming ....................................................... 5-49
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-110 Headlamps ............................................ 3-14, 5-50
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-110 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-49
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-116 Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-109 Electrical System ....................................... 5-109
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
G Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-51
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
Gage High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Check Gages Warning Light .......................... 3-47 On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-40 Washer ...................................................... 3-11
Fuel .......................................................... 3-48 Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-44 Heater ........................................................... 3-21
Speedometer .............................................. 3-32 Heater ........................................................... 3-23
Tachometer ................................................. 3-32 Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-47
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-37 High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-66
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-52 Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-28
Gasoline Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-29
Octane ........................................................ 5-6 Hood
Specifications ............................................... 5-6 Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Gate Ajar Light ............................................... 3-48 Release ..................................................... 5-11
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-57 Horn ............................................................... 3-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-18

6
 I LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-41
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-21 License Plate Lamps ....................................... 5-53
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-35 Liftgate/Liftglass .............................................. 2-12
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-64 Liftglass/Liftgate .............................................. 2-12
Instrument Panel Light
Overview ..................................................... 3-4 Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-33
Instrument Panel (I/P) Antilock Brake System Warning ..................... 3-39
Brightness .................................................. 3-17 Brake System Warning ................................. 3-38
Cluster ....................................................... 3-31 Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-45
Charging System ......................................... 3-36
Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-47
J Check Gas Cap ..........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
3-49
3-46
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
Gate Ajar ................................................... 3-48
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-47
K Low Fuel Warning .......................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
3-49
3-41
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-34
Keys ............................................................... 2-3 Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-46
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-32
Security ..................................................... 3-46
L Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light .........
StabiliTrak® Indicator ....................................
3-47
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-58 3-40
Lamps StabiliTrak® Service ...................................... 3-39
Dome ........................................................ 3-17 Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-41
Dome Lamp Override ................................... 3-17 Lighting
Reading ..................................................... 3-18 Entry ......................................................... 3-18
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-26 Exit ........................................................... 3-18

7
Lights ............................................................ 3-14 Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8 Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8 Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15 Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-14
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-34 Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Locking Rear Axle ............................................ 4-5 Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Locks Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-8 Using .......................................................... 6-3
Door ........................................................... 2-7 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-41
Power Door .................................................. 2-8 Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9 Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11 Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12 Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ...................... 1-5
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-49 Message
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-58 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-53
Lumbar Mirrors
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3 Automatic Dimming Rearview with
Power Controls ............................................. 1-4 Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-44
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
OnStar® and Compass .............................. 2-39
M Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-41
Maintenance Schedule
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-39
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-39
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-48
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-47
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-48
Introduction .................................................. 6-2

8
Mirrors (cont.) Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-46 Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-28
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-47 Outlets
MP3 ............................................................. 3-82 Accessory Power ......................................... 3-20
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-5 Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-48
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-47
N Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-48
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-46
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-47
Navigation/Radio System,
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-57
see Navigation Manual ................................. 3-87
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-20
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

O P
Odometer ...................................................... 3-32
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-106
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-32
Park Brake .................................................... 2-33
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-13
Park (P)
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-34
Oil
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-36
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-45
Parking
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-37
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-44
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-34
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-19
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-61
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5
PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-18
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-18
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-48
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-17
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-52

9
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4 Radios (cont.)
Power Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-66
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8 Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-101
Electrical System ....................................... 5-109 Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-18
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-4 Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-46
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-46 Locking ........................................................ 4-5
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-22 Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-28
Seat ............................................................ 1-3 Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36 Rear Floor Storage Lid .................................... 2-59
Windows .................................................... 2-14 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-100
Privacy .......................................................... 7-18 Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-87
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-18 Rear Seat Operation ....................................... 1-11
Navigation System ....................................... 7-19 Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-10
OnStar ....................................................... 7-19 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-19 Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-44
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-9 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar® and Compass ................................. 2-39
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
R OnStar®, Compass and Temperature Display ... 2-41
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-39
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-28
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-39
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-19
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-7
Radios .......................................................... 3-65
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-66
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-40
Radios
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-46
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Manual ................................................... 3-87
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ... 2-5
Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-100
Reception ................................................. 3-102

10
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Safety Belts (cont.)
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-87 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-31
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-84 Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-13
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-54 Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-14 Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Reporting Safety Defects Seats
Canadian Government .................................. 7-16 Head Restraints .......................................... 1-10
General Motors ........................................... 7-16 Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
United States Government ............................ 7-15 Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3
Restraint System Check Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ........................... 1-5
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-68 Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-4
Replacing Restraint System Parts Power Seats ................................................. 1-3
After a Crash .......................................... 1-69 Rear Seat Operation .................................... 1-11
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-22 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-7
Roadside Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-92
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-8 Securing a Child Restraint
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-34 Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-49
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-15 Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-47
Running Out of Fuel ........................................ 2-38 Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-50
Security Light ................................................. 3-46
Service ........................................................... 5-3
S Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Safety Belt
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-32
California Pershlorate Materials Requirements ... 5-4
Safety Belts
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4
Care of .................................................... 5-103
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-18
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-41
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-26
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-31

11
Service (cont.) Storage Areas (cont.)
Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light ..................... 3-47 Glove Box .................................................. 2-57
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16 Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-58
Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 7-10 Overhead Console ....................................... 2-57
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-66 Rear Floor Storage Lid ................................. 2-59
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-106 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-33
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-34 Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-36 Sunroof ......................................................... 2-60
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Snow Plow .................................................... 4-40
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-99
Installing .................................................... 5-87
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-32
Removing ................................................... 5-84
Taillamps
Storing ....................................................... 5-96
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-51
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-120
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-101
Speedometer .................................................. 3-32
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-6
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-16
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ................................ 3-40
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-18
StabiliTrak® Service Light ................................. 3-39
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-18
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-22
Passlock® ................................................... 2-17
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-101
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-66
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Tire
Storage Areas
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-41
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-57
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-59

12
Tires ............................................................. 5-57 Towing
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ........................ 5-105 Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-40
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-74 Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-45
Chains ....................................................... 5-80 Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-40
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-82 Traction
Cleaning ................................................... 5-106 StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-6
Different Size .............................................. 5-76 Transmission
High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-66 Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-81 Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-26
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-64 Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-32
Inflator,- Accessory ....................................... 5-80 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-72 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-87
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-69
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-67
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-87
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-84
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-52
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-92
Operation ................................................... 2-52
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-99
Using this Manual ............................................... iii
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-96
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-58
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-61
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-77
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-78
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-78
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-73

13
 V Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-78
Vehicle Different Size .............................................. 5-76
Control ........................................................ 4-3 Replacement ............................................... 5-78
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40
Loading ...................................................... 4-34 Windows ....................................................... 2-13
Symbols ......................................................... iv Power ........................................................ 2-14
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-58 Windshield
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-18 Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ........ 5-105
Vehicle Identification Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-108 Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-37
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-108 Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-54
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-28 Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-109
Visors ........................................................... 2-15 Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-37 Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-10
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-30

W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-30 X
Warnings XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-86
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-53 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-103
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Y
Washer, Headlamps ........................................ 3-11 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14